624675
6
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/410
Next page
S-Class Coupe
Operator's Manual
Order no. 6515 4538 13 Part no. 217 584 34 01 Edition A 2016
É21758434017ËÍ
2175843401
S-Class Coupe Operator's Manual
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
only)
Editorial office
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc.
R
Burmester
®
is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows media
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-
tion.
R
SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGATSurvey
®
and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succes-
sion indicate an instruction with sev-
eral steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can
find more information about a topic.
YY
This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the
next page.
Dis‐
play
This text indicates a message in the
multifunction/COMAND/Audio dis-
play.
As at 23.09.2014
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-
tions and warning notices in this manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
R
model
R
order
R
country specification
R
availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
R
design
R
equipment
R
technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
R
Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Apple
®
iOS
Android™
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App may not yet be available in your country.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2175843401
É21758434017ËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 22
At a glance ........................................... 31
Safety ................................................... 43
Opening and closing ........................... 81
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 105
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 123
Climate control ................................. 135
Driving and parking .......................... 149
On-board computer and displays .... 229
Stowage and features ...................... 299
Maintenance and care ...................... 323
Breakdown assistance ..................... 341
Wheels and tires ............................... 361
Technical data ................................... 397
Contents
3
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) .................................................. 199
12 V socket
see Sockets
360° camera
Cleaning .........................................336
Function/notes .............................211
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 252
Function/notes ................................ 68
Important safety notes .................... 68
Warning lamp ................................. 288
Accident
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 62
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 138
Activating/deactivating Night
View Assist Plus
With spotlight function ................... 221
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 246
Display message ............................ 274
Function/information .................... 222
Active Body Control (ABC)
Display message ............................ 273
Function/notes ............................. 194
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 246
Display message ............................ 274
Function/information .................... 225
Active multicontour seat .................. 111
Active Parking Assist
Detecting parking spaces .............. 203
Display message ............................ 275
Exiting a parking space .................. 205
Function/notes ............................. 202
Important safety notes .................. 202
Parking .......................................... 204
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 75
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................ 72
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 198
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Display message ............................ 268
Function/notes ............................. 127
Switching on/off ........................... 128
Additional speedometer ................... 248
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 403
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 59
Display message ............................ 264
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 52
Important safety notes .................... 50
Introduction ..................................... 50
Knee bag .......................................... 52
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 53
PASSENGER AIR BAG indica
tor
l
amps ............................................... 45
Side impact air bag .......................... 52
Window curtain air bag .................... 53
Air vents
Glove box ....................................... 147
Important safety notes .................. 146
Rear ............................................... 147
Setting ........................................... 146
Setting the center air vents ........... 146
Setting the side air vents ............... 147
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
AIRMATIC
Display message ............................ 272
Function/notes ............................. 197
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 78
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 78
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
4
Index
Armrest
Stowage compartment .................. 302
Ashtray ...............................................306
Assistance display (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................243
Assistance menu (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................244
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........330
Hiding a service message .............. 330
Resetting the service interval dis-
play ................................................ 330
Service message ............................ 330
Special service requirements ......... 331
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 78
Function ...........................................78
Switching off the alarm .................... 78
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 246
Display message ............................ 272
Function/notes ............................. 215
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 267
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 331
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .................................... 156
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 156
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 124
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 162
Automatic drive program ............... 164
Changing gear ............................... 162
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 159
Display message ............................ 281
Driving tips .................................... 162
Emergency running mode .............. 167
Engaging drive position .................. 161
Engaging neutral ............................ 160
Engaging park position au
tomati
-
cally ............................................... 159
Engaging reverse gear ................... 160
Engaging the park position ............ 159
Kickdown ....................................... 162
Manual drive program .................... 164
Manual drive program (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles) ................................ 165
Oil temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 249
Overview ........................................ 159
Problem (malfunction) ................... 167
Program selector button ................ 163
Pulling away ................................... 154
Starting the engine ........................ 153
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 163
Transmission position display ........ 161
Transmission positions .................. 162
Automatic transmission emer-
gency mode ....................................... 167
B
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
Function/notes ................................ 69
Important safety notes .................... 69
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 86
Important safety notes .................... 85
Replacing ......................................... 86
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 349
Display message ............................ 269
Important safety notes .................. 347
Jump starting ................................. 351
Belt
see Seat belts
Blind Spot Assist
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 258
Notes ............................................. 403
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Index
5
Brake lamps
Display message ............................ 266
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 68
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72
BAS .................................................. 68
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Assist ............................................... 69
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 403
Display message ............................ 252
EBD .................................................. 75
High-performance brake system .... 178
Hill start assist ............................... 155
HOLD function ............................... 192
Important safety notes .................. 176
Maintenance .................................. 176
Parking brake ................................ 172
Riding tips ...................................... 176
Warning lamp ................................. 287
Breakdown
Where will I find...? ........................ 342
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) ................................... 35
Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 231
C
California
Important notice for retail cus-
tomers and lessees .......................... 24
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Camera
see 360° camera
see Rear view camera
Car
see Vehicle
Car key
see SmartKey
Care
360° camera ................................. 336
Car wash ........................................ 331
Carpets .......................................... 339
Display ........................................... 337
Exhaust pipe .................................. 337
Exterior lights ................................ 335
Gear or selector lever .................... 338
Interior ........................................... 337
Matte finish ................................... 334
Night View Assist Plus ................... 337
Notes ............................................. 331
Paint .............................................. 333
Plastic trim .................................... 338
Power washer ................................ 333
Rear view camera .......................... 336
Roof lining ...................................... 339
Seat belt ........................................ 339
Seat cover ..................................... 338
Sensors ......................................... 335
Steering wheel ............................... 338
Trim pieces .................................... 338
Washing by hand ........................... 333
Wheels ........................................... 334
Windows ........................................ 335
Wiper blades .................................. 335
Wooden trim .................................. 338
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 240
Center console
Overview .......................................... 37
Stowage space .............................. 301
Center console in the rear com-
partment
Stowage compartment .................. 302
Central locking
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 83
Changing the media source ............. 240
Child
Restraint system .............................. 64
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 67
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 65
On the front-passenger seat ............ 66
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 66
Top Tether ....................................... 65
Children
Special seat belt retractor ............... 63
Cigarette lighter ................................ 306
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 335
Climate control
Automa
tic climate control ............. 137
Controlling automatically ............... 139
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 138
6
Index
Defrosting the windows ................. 141
Defrosting the windshield .............. 141
ECO start/stop function ................ 137
General notes ................................ 136
Indicator lamp ................................ 139
Ionization ....................................... 146
Notes on using the automatic cli-
mate control .................................. 137
Overview of systems ...................... 136
Perfume atomizer .......................... 144
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 143
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 139
Refrigerant ..................................... 405
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 406
Setting the air distribution ............. 140
Setting the air vents ...................... 146
Setting the airflow ......................... 141
Setting the climate mode ............... 140
Setting the temperature ................ 140
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 143
Switching on/off ........................... 138
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 143
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 142
Switching the synchronization
function on and off ........................ 141
Climate control system
Climate control .............................. 138
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 32
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS
Activating/deactivating ................. 245
Display message ............................ 259
Operation/notes .............................. 70
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 337
Combination switch .......................... 126
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 236
Convenience closing feature .............. 99
Convenience opening feature ............ 99
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 328
Display message ............................ 268
Filling capacity ............................... 405
Important safety notes .................. 404
Temperature gauge ........................ 231
Warning lamp ................................. 294
Coolbox
.............................................. 308
C
ooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 29
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 265
Function/notes ............................. 127
Crash-responsive emergency light-
ing ....................................................... 130
Crosswind Assist (vehicles with
MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ................... 194
Crosswind Assist (vehicles with-
out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 74
Cruise control
Calling up the speed last stored .... 180
Cruise control lever ....................... 180
Deactivating ................................... 181
Display message ............................ 278
Driving system ............................... 179
Function/notes ............................. 179
General notes ................................ 179
Important safety notes .................. 179
Setting a speed .............................. 181
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 180
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 304
Important safety notes .................. 304
Rear compartment ......................... 305
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ..................................................... 27
Customer Relations Department ....... 27
D
Data
see Technical data
Data carrier
Selecting ........................................ 240
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 267
Function/notes ............................. 124
Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 248
Index
7
Declarations of conformity .................26
Diagnostics connection ...................... 26
Digital speedometer .........................237
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission ................. 159
Display
see Display messages
see Warning and indicator lamps
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 330
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 251
Driving systems .............................272
Engine ............................................ 268
General notes ................................ 251
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 251
Introduction ................................... 251
Lights ............................................. 265
Safety systems .............................. 252
SmartKey ....................................... 283
Tires ............................................... 279
Vehicle ...........................................281
Distance recorder
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 296
Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 71
DISTRONIC PLUS
Activating ....................................... 184
Activation conditions ..................... 184
Cruise control lever ....................... 183
Deactivating ................................... 188
Display message ............................ 276
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 187
Driving tips ....................................189
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 185
Function/notes .............................182
Important safety notes .................. 182
Setting a speed .............................. 186
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 187
Stopping ........................................ 186
with Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot ............................................... 190
Doors
Automatic locking (switch) ...............90
Central locking/unlocking
(Smart
Key) .
......................................83
Control panel ...................................40
Display message ............................ 282
Emergency locking ........................... 91
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90
Important safety notes .................... 89
Opening (from inside) ...................... 89
Power closing .................................. 90
Drinking and driving ......................... 174
Drive program
Automatic ...................................... 164
Manual ........................................... 164
Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) ............................................... 165
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 250
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 331
Driving Assistance package ............. 222
Driving on flooded roads .................. 178
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 68
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 75
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Assist ............................................... 69
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS ................................................ 70
Distance warning function ............... 71
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution) ............................................. 75
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 73
Important safety information ........... 67
Overview .......................................... 67
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake ............................. 75
STEER CONTROL ............................. 77
Driving systems
360°camera .................................. 211
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 222
Active Body Control ABC ............... 194
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 225
Active Parking Assist ..................... 202
AIRMATIC ...................................... 197
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 215
Cruise control ................................ 179
8
Index
Display message ............................ 272
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 182
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 190
Driving Assistance package ........... 222
HOLD function ............................... 192
Night View Assist Plus ................... 219
PARKTRONIC ................................. 199
Rear view camera .......................... 207
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 217
Driving tips
AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 178
Automatic transmission ................. 162
Brakes ........................................... 176
Break-in period .............................. 150
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 189
Downhill gradient ........................... 176
Drinking and driving ....................... 174
Driving in winter ............................. 178
Driving on flooded roads ................ 178
Driving on wet roads ...................... 178
Exhaust check ............................... 174
Fuel ................................................ 174
General .......................................... 174
Hydroplaning ................................. 178
Icy road surfaces ........................... 178
Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ted roads ....................................... 176
Snow chains .................................. 365
Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 176
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 150
Wet road surface ........................... 176
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 241
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Function/notes ............................. 116
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive ........................... 117
Function/notes ............................. 116
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution)
Display message ............................ 255
Function/notes ................................ 75
ECO display
Function/notes ............................. 175
On-board computer ....................... 236
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 156
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 156
Deactivating/activating ................. 157
General information ....................... 155
Important safety notes .................. 155
Introduction ................................... 155
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 62
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 90
Trunk ............................................... 97
Vehicle ............................................. 90
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation ......................................... 59
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 23
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 293
Display message ............................ 268
ECO start/stop function ................ 155
Engine number ............................... 400
Irregular running ............................ 158
Jump-starting ................................. 351
Starting (important safety notes) ... 153
Starting problems .......................... 158
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 153
Starting via smartphone ................ 154
Starting with the Start/Stop but-
ton ................................................. 154
Switching off .................................. 171
Switching off with the Start/Stop
button ............................................ 171
Switching off with the vehicle key .. 171
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 356
Engine electronics
Notes ............................................. 398
Problem (malfunction) ................... 158
Engine emergency stop .................... 359
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 327
Additives
........................................ 403
C
hecking the oil level ..................... 325
Index
9
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 325
Checking the oil level using the
on-board computer ........................ 327
Display message ............................ 270
Filling capacity ...............................403
Notes about oil grades ................... 403
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 325
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............249
Viscosity ........................................ 403
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 250
Characteristics ................................. 73
Deactivating/activating ................... 74
Display message ............................ 252
Function/notes ................................ 73
General notes .................................. 73
Important safety information ........... 73
Warning lamp ................................. 290
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
tem) ...................................................... 73
Exhaust
see Exhaust pipe
Exhaust check ................................... 174
Exhaust pipe
Cleaning ......................................... 337
Exterior lighting
Cleaning ......................................... 335
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ....................................... 118
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 118
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 118
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 119
Setting ........................................... 118
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 121
Storing the parking position .......... 119
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 301
F
Features ............................................. 304
Filler cap
see Refueling
Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 400
Flat tire
Changing a wheel/mounting the
spare wheel ................................... 383
MOExtended tires .......................... 343
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 342
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 344
Floormats ........................................... 320
Frequencies
Mobile phone ................................. 398
Two-way radio ................................ 398
Front-passenger seat
Adjusting from the driver's seat ..... 108
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 402
Consumption statistics .................. 236
Displaying the current consump-
tion ................................................ 235
Displaying the range ...................... 235
Driving tips .................................... 174
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 401
Important safety notes .................. 401
Notes for MercedesAMG vehi-
cles ................................................ 402
Problem (malfunction) ................... 170
Refueling ........................................ 167
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 401
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 235
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 401
Problem (malfunction) ................... 170
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 358
Before changing ............................. 357
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 357
Engine emergency stop ................. 359
Fuse box in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 358
Fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell .......................................... 357
Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 358
Important safety notes .................. 356
10
Index
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory .....................320
General notes ................................ 317
Important safety notes .................. 317
Opening/closing the garage door .. 320
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 318
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 318
Gasoline ............................................. 401
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 249
Genuine parts ...................................... 22
Glove box ...........................................301
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 94
Hazard warning lamps ......................126
Head bags
Display message ............................ 262
Head restraints
Adjusting ....................................... 109
Adjusting (manually) ......................109
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 110
Head-up display
Adjusting the brightness ................ 247
Displays and operating .................. 233
Function/notes .............................233
Important safety notes .................. 233
Selecting displays .......................... 246
Setting the position ....................... 247
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 121
Headlamps
Fogging up ..................................... 129
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher .............................126
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 127
Display message ............................ 266
Switching on/off ........................... 126
Hill start assist .................................. 155
HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 193
Activation conditions ..................... 193
Deactivating ................................... 193
Display message ............................ 276
Function/notes .............................192
General notes ................................ 192
Hood
Closing ...........................................325
Display message ............................ 282
Important safety notes .................. 324
Opening ......................................... 324
Horn ...................................................... 32
HUD
see Head-up display
Hydroplaning ..................................... 178
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 78
Indicator and warning lamps
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS .............................................. 296
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 33
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 230
Interior lighting
Control ...........................................129
Emergency lighting ........................ 130
Overview ........................................ 129
Reading lamp ................................. 129
J
Jack
Using ............................................. 385
Jump starting (engine) ......................351
K
Key positions
SmartKey ....................................... 151
Index
11
Start/Stop button .......................... 151
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature ............ 99
Deactivation ..................................... 83
General notes .................................. 83
Locking ............................................ 83
Start function ................................... 84
Unlocking ......................................... 83
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 162
Knee bag .............................................. 52
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 65
License plate lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 266
Light function, active
Display message ............................ 267
Light sensor (display message) ....... 267
Lights
Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 127
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 124
Cornering light function ................. 127
Fogged up headlamps .................... 129
General notes ................................ 124
Hazard warning lamps ................... 126
High beam flasher .......................... 126
High-beam headlamps ................... 126
Light switch ................................... 124
Low-beam headlamps .................... 125
Parking lamps ................................ 125
Setting exterior lighting ................. 124
Standing lamps .............................. 125
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 248
Switching the spotlight on/off ....... 247
Turn signals ................................... 126
see Interior lighting
see Replacing bulbs
Loading guidelines ............................ 300
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 90
Emergency locking ........................... 91
From inside (central locking but-
ton) .................................................. 89
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 265
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port ................................................ 111
M
M+S tires ............................................ 364
Magic Body Control ........................... 194
MAGIC SKY CONTROL ....................... 103
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 334
MBC
see Magic Body Control
mbrace
Call priority .................................... 313
Display message ............................ 259
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 313
Downloading routes ....................... 316
Emergency call .............................. 310
General notes ................................ 309
Geo fencing ................................... 317
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 315
MB info call button ........................ 312
Remote fault diagnosis .................. 315
Remote vehicle locking .................. 315
Roadside Assistance button .......... 311
Search & Send ............................... 314
Self-test ......................................... 310
Speed alert .................................... 316
System .......................................... 309
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 317
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 314
12
Index
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 85
General notes .................................. 85
Inserting .......................................... 85
Locking vehicle ................................ 91
Removing .........................................85
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 90
Media Interface
USB port in the armrest of the
center console ...............................302
see Separate operating instructions
Memory card (audio) ......................... 240
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel, exterior
mirrors ...........................................120
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
360°camera .................................. 211
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......... 68
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 222
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 225
Active Parking Assist ..................... 202
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 215
BAS (Brake Assist) ........................... 68
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)
with Cross-Traffic Assist .................. 69
Crosswind Assist (vehicles with
MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ...............194
Crosswind Assist (vehicles with-
out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ........... 74
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 182
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ...............190
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 73
General notes ................................ 179
MAGIC BODY CONTROL ................ 194
Night View Assist Plus ................... 219
PARKTRONIC ................................. 199
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 61
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake .............................75
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 61
Rear view camera .......................... 207
ROAD SURFACE SCAN .................. 196
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 217
Message memory (on-board com-
puter) ......
............................................ 251
Messages
see D
isplay messages
see Warning and indicator lamps
Mirror turn signal
Cleaning ......................................... 335
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Frequencies ................................... 398
Installation .....................................398
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 241
Transmission output (maximum) .... 398
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ...........................................84
MOExtended tires .............................. 343
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 388
Mounting a new wheel ................... 387
Preparing the vehicle .....................384
Raising the vehicle ......................... 385
Removing a wheel .......................... 387
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 384
MP3
Operation ....................................... 240
Multifunction display
Function/notes .............................232
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 231
Overview .......................................... 35
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 237
Night View Assist Plus
Activating/deactivating ................. 220
Cleaning ......................................... 337
Display message ............................ 275
Function/notes .............................219
Pedestrian and animal recogni-
tion ................................................ 219
Problem (malfunction) ................... 222
Index
13
Switching automatic activation
on/off ............................................ 244
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
cle ....................................................... 150
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 54
Faults ............................................... 58
Operation ......................................... 54
System self-test ............................... 56
Occupant safety
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 62
Children in the vehicle ..................... 62
Important safety notes .................... 45
Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 44
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 53
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 45
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 67
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 61
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 61
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 54
Faults ............................................... 58
Operation ......................................... 54
System self-test ............................... 56
Odometer ........................................... 235
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 249
Assistance graphic menu ............... 243
Assistance menu ........................... 244
Display messages .......................... 251
Displaying a service message ........ 330
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 187
Factory settings ............................. 249
Head-up display ............................. 233
Important safety notes .................. 230
Instrument cluster menu ............... 248
Lights menu ................................... 247
Media menu ................................... 240
Menu overview .............................. 235
Message memory .......................... 251
Navigation menu ............................ 237
Operation ....................................... 231
Radio menu ................................... 239
Service menu ................................. 243
Settings menu ............................... 244
Standard display ............................ 235
Telephone menu ............................ 241
Trip menu ...................................... 235
Video DVD operation ..................... 241
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Important safety notes .................... 25
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Overview .......................................... 23
Vehicle eq
uip
ment ........................... 23
Outside temperature display ........... 231
Overhead control panel ...................... 39
P
Paint code number ............................ 399
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 333
Panic alarm .......................................... 44
Panorama roof ................................... 101
Parcel net hooks ............................... 303
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 170
Parking brake ................................ 172
Position of exterior mirror, front-
passenger side ............................... 119
Rear view camera .......................... 207
Switching off the engine ................ 171
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
see 360° camera
see Active Parking Assist
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
see Rear view camera
Parking assistance
see PARKTRONIC
14
Index
Parking brake
Display message ............................255
Electric parking brake .................... 172
Warning lamp ................................. 292
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 125
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 201
Driving system ............................... 199
Function/notes .............................199
Important safety notes .................. 199
Problem (malfunction) ................... 202
Range of the sensors ..................... 199
Warning display ............................. 200
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message ............................ 264
Indicator lamps ................................ 45
Problem (malfunction) ................... 264
Perfume atomizer
Operating ....................................... 144
Perfume vial ................................... 144
Problem (malfunction) ................... 146
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 338
Power locks ......................................... 90
Power washers .................................. 333
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection)
Display message ............................ 259
Operation ......................................... 61
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
Activating/deactivating ................. 245
Display message ............................ 260
Function/notes ................................ 75
Important safety notes .................... 75
Warning lamp ................................. 296
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS)
Display message ............................ 260
Operation ......................................... 61
Program selector button .................. 163
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78
Immobilizer ...................................... 78
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 22
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 154
General notes ................................ 154
Hill start assist ............................... 155
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 28
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26
R
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 239
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Reading lamp ..................................... 129
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ...................... 147
Stowage compartment .................. 302
Rear lamps
see Lights
Rear seats
Overview .......................................... 41
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 336
Displays in the COMAND display ... 208
Function/notes ............................. 207
Rear window blind ............................ 306
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 143
Switching on/off ........................... 142
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 117
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 405
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Important safety notes .................. 167
Notes for MercedesAMG vehi-
cles ................................................ 402
Index
15
Refueling process .......................... 168
see Fuel
Remote control
Garage door opener .......................317
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 318
Replacing bulbs
General notes ................................ 130
Reporting safety defects .................... 27
Rescue card ......................................... 28
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 271
Warning lamp ................................. 293
Residual heat (climate control) ........143
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 262
Introduction ..................................... 44
Warning lamp ................................. 292
Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Reversing feature
Roller sunblind ............................... 101
Side windows ................................... 98
Trunk lid ...........................................92
Reversing lamps (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 267
ROAD SURFACE SCAN ....................... 196
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24
Roller sunblind
Panorama roof ............................... 101
Rear window .................................. 306
Roller sunblind for the panorama
roof
Opening and closing ...................... 102
Operating ....................................... 101
Resetting ....................................... 102
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 339
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 406
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 62
see Occupant safety
see Operating safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD memory card
Selecting ........................................ 240
Seat
Adjusting the front-passenger
seat from the driver's seat ............. 108
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-
passenger seat belt ......................... 50
Cleaning ......................................... 339
Correct usage .................................. 47
Fastening ......................................... 48
Important safety guidelines ............. 46
Introduction ..................................... 46
Releasing ......................................... 49
Warning lamp ................................. 285
Warning lamp (function) ................... 50
Seating
Seating comfort package ............... 111
Seating comfort package ................. 111
Seats
Active multicontour seat ................ 111
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 108
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port ................................................ 111
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 109
Calling up a stored setting (mem-
ory function) .................................. 121
Cleaning the cover ......................... 338
Correct driver's seat position ........ 106
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system ............. 116
Folding the backrests forward/
back ............................................... 110
Important safety notes .................. 107
Seat backrest display message ..... 283
Seat heating .................................. 111
Seat heating problem .................... 113
Seat ventilation .............................. 113
Seat ventilation problem ................ 114
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 121
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 111
Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 113
Section
Wheels and tires ............................ 362
Securing a load
see Securing cargo
16
Index
Securing cargo ..................................303
Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 338
see Automatic transmission
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 335
Service menu (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................243
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 403
Coolant (engine) ............................ 404
Engine oil ....................................... 403
Fuel ................................................ 401
Important safety notes .................. 400
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem) ............................................... 405
Washer fluid ................................... 405
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 249
On-board computer ....................... 244
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 250
Side impact air bag .............................52
Side marker lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 267
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 335
Convenience closing feature ............ 99
Convenience opening feature ..........99
Important safety information ........... 97
Opening/closing .............................. 98
Problem (malfunction) ................... 101
Resetting ....................................... 100
Reversing feature .............................98
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 86
Changing the programming .............84
Checking the battery .......................86
Convenience closing feature ............ 99
Convenience opening feature .......... 99
Display message ............................ 283
Door central loc
king/
unlocking .......83
Important safety notes .................... 82
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 84
Loss .................................................87
Mechanical key ................................ 85
Overview .......................................... 82
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 151
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87
Starting the engine ........................ 153
Smartphone
Starting the engine ........................ 154
Snow chains ...................................... 365
Sockets
Center console .............................. 307
General notes ................................ 307
Rear compartment .........................307
Trunk ............................................. 308
Special seat belt retractor .................. 63
Specialist workshop ............................ 26
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Activating/deactivating the addi-
tional speedometer ........................ 248
Digital ............................................ 237
In the Instrument cluster ................. 33
Selecting the display unit ...............248
see Instrument cluster
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 267
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Start/Stop button
General notes ................................ 151
Key positions ................................. 152
Removing ....................................... 153
Starting the engine ........................ 154
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 153
STEER CONTROL .................................. 77
Steering
Display message ............................ 283
Warning lamps ............................... 298
Steering Assist
see DISTRONIC PLUS
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
(DISTRONIC PLUS)
Display message .....................
....... 278
Ste
ering assistant STEER CON-
TROL
see STEER CONTROL
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 114
Index
17
Button overview ............................... 35
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 231
Cleaning .........................................338
EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 116
Important safety notes .................. 114
Paddle shifters ............................... 163
Steering wheel heating .................. 115
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 121
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) ................... 116
Switching on/off ........................... 115
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........163
Stop&Go Pilot
see DISTRONIC PLUS
Stowage areas ................................... 300
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) .............................302
Center console .............................. 301
Center console in rear compart-
ment .............................................. 302
Cup holders ................................... 304
Door ............................................... 302
Eyeglasses compartment ...............301
Glove box ....................................... 301
Important safety information ......... 300
Rear ............................................... 302
Rear seat backrest ......................... 302
Stowage net ................................... 303
see Stowage areas
Stowage net ....................................... 303
Stowage space
Parcel net retainers ....................... 303
Securing a load .............................. 303
Stowage well beneath the trunk
floor .................................................... 303
Summer tires
In winter ........................................ 364
Sun visor ............................................ 305
Suspension tuning
Active Body Control ABC ...............195
AIRMATIC ...................................... 198
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 250
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 143
T
Tachometer ........................................ 230
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 266
see Lights
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 400
Information ....................................398
Tires/wheels ................................. 388
Vehicle data ................................... 406
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 242
Display message ............................ 283
Introduction ................................... 241
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 241
Number from the phone book ........242
Redialing ........................................ 243
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 242
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 231
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............249
Outside temperature ......................231
Setting (climate control) ................ 140
Transmission oil (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 249
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 369
Checking manually ........................ 368
Display message ............................ 279
Maximum ....................................... 368
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 346
Notes ............................................. 367
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 346
Recommended ............................... 365
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 370
Function/notes .............................369
General notes ................................ 369
Important safety notes .................. 369
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ........................... 372
Restarting ...................................... 371
18
Index
Warning lamp ................................. 297
Warning message .......................... 371
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 344
Tire pressure not reached .............. 346
Tire pressure reached .................... 346
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 382
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 381
Bar (definition) ...............................381
Changing a wheel .......................... 383
Characteristics .............................. 381
Checking ........................................ 363
Curb weight (definition) ................. 382
Definition of terms ......................... 381
Direction of rotation ...................... 384
Display message ............................ 279
Distribution of the vehicle occu-
pants (definition) ............................ 383
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) (definition) ............................. 381
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 380
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) ..................................... 381
General notes ................................ 388
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
inition) ........................................... 381
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) (definition) .............................. 382
Important safety notes .................. 362
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ...... 381
Information on driving .................... 362
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 382
Labeling (overview) ........................ 377
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 383
Load index ..................................... 379
Load index (definition) ................... 382
Maximum load on a tire (defini-
tion) ............................................... 382
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition)
..................................... 382
Ma
ximum permissible tire pres-
sure (definition) ............................. 382
Maximum tire load ......................... 380
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 382
MOExtended tires .......................... 364
Optional equipment weight (defi-
nition) ............................................ 382
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
inition) ........................................... 382
Replacing ....................................... 383
Service life ..................................... 364
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 382
Snow chains .................................. 365
Speed rating (definition) ................ 381
Storing ........................................... 384
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 381
Summer tires in winter .................. 364
Temperature .................................. 377
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 383
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 382
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 382
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 381
Tire size (data) ............................... 388
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 377
Tire tread ....................................... 363
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 382
Total load limit (definition) ............. 383
Traction ......................................... 376
Traction (definition) ....................... 383
Tread wear ..................................... 376
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 376
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 381
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 383
Wheel and tire combination ........... 391
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 381
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 65
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 356
Important safety notes .................. 354
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 354
Installing the towing eye ................ 355
Notes for 4MATIC vehicl
es ............ 356
R
emoving the towing eye ............... 355
Transporting the vehicle ................ 356
With both axles on the ground ....... 355
With the rear axle raised ................ 356
Index
19
Towing eye ......................................... 342
Traffic Sign Assist
Activating ....................................... 218
Display message ............................ 276
Function/notes ............................. 217
Important safety notes .................. 217
Instrument cluster display ............. 218
Switching on/off ........................... 245
Transfer case ..................................... 167
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transporting the vehicle .................. 356
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 338
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 236
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 235
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 237
Trunk
Emergency release .......................... 96
Important safety notes .................... 92
Locking separately ........................... 96
Opening/closing (automatically
from inside) ...................................... 95
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 92
Opening/closing (from outside,
HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 94
Power closing .................................. 90
Trunk lid
Display message ............................ 282
Obstacle recognition ........................ 92
Opening dimensions ...................... 406
Opening/closing .............................. 92
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 406
Turn signals
Display message ............................ 265
Switching on/off ........................... 126
Two-way radio
Frequencies ................................... 398
Installation ..................................... 398
Transmission output (maximum) .... 398
Windshield (infrared reflective) ...... 321
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 89
Upshift indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 249
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 305
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 27
Data acquisition ............................... 28
Display message ............................ 281
Electronics ..................................... 398
Equipment ....................................... 23
Individual settings .......................... 244
Limited Warranty ............................. 27
Loading .......................................... 372
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 91
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 83
Lowering ........................................ 388
Maintenance .................................... 24
Operating safety .............................. 25
Parking .......................................... 170
Parking for a long period ................ 173
Pulling away ................................... 154
Raising ........................................... 385
Reporting problems ......................... 27
Securing from rolling away ............ 384
Towing away .................................. 354
Transporting .................................. 356
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 90
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 83
Vehicle data ................................... 406
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 406
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 91
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 399
Vehicle level
Active Body Control ABC ............... 194
AIRMATIC ...................................... 197
Display message ............................ 272
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 342
20
Index
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 241
VIN ...................................................... 399
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 288
Brakes ........................................... 287
Check Engine ................................. 293
Coolant .......................................... 294
Distance warning ........................... 296
ESP
®
.............................................. 290
ESP
®
OFF ....................................... 291
Fuel tank ........................................ 293
General notes ................................ 285
Overview .......................................... 34
Parking brake ................................ 292
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 45
Reserve fuel ................................... 293
Restraint system ............................ 292
Seat belt ........................................ 285
Steering ......................................... 298
Tire pressure monitor .................... 297
Warranty .............................................. 23
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 283
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 391
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 388
Wheel chock ...................................... 384
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 383
Checking ........................................ 363
Cleaning ......................................... 334
General notes ................................ 388
Important safety notes .................. 362
Information on driving .................... 362
Interchanging/changing ................ 383
Mounting a new wheel ................... 387
Mounting a wheel .......................... 384
Removing a wheel .......................... 387
Snow chains .................................. 365
Storing ........................................... 384
Tightening torque ........................... 388
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 388
Window curtain air bag
Operation ......................................... 53
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 141
Infrared reflective .......................... 321
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 329
Notes ............................................. 405
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 133
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 131
Switching on/off ........................... 130
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 364
Slippery road surfaces ................... 178
Snow chains .................................. 365
Winter operation
Summer tires ................................. 364
Winter tires
M+S tires .......................................
364
Wi
per blades
Cleaning ......................................... 335
Important safety notes .................. 131
Replacing ....................................... 131
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 338
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Index
21
Protection of the environment
General notes
H
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
R
operating conditions of your vehicle
R
your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
R
avoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
sumption.
R
always make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
R
do not carry any unnecessary weight.
R
remove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
R
a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
R
always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
R
do not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
R
drive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
R
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
R
change gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
R
switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
R
keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
tion.
Environmental concerns and recom-
mendations
Wherever the operating instructions require
you to dispose of materials, first try to regen-
erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
environmental rules and regulations when
disposing of materials. In this way you will
help to protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
!
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
R
doors
R
door pillars
R
door sills
R
seats
R
cockpit
R
instrument cluster
R
center console
Do not install accessories such as audio
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
tems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
22
Introduction
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels
as well as accessories relevant to safety
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and
accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been spe-
cifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should
therefore be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi-
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-
ters provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-
Benz parts (
Y page 399).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are possi-
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
in accordance with the warranty terms and
conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
mation booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
R
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
R
Emission System Warranty
R
Emission Performance Warranty
R
California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys-
tem Warranty
R
State warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
sories warranties. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Should you lose your Service and War-
ranty Information booklet, have an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. The new Service and War-
ranty Information booklet will be posted to
you.
Introduction
23
Z
Information for customers in Califor-
nia
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a rea-
sonable number of repair attempts
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-
ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or
more substantial defects or malfunctions in
the vehicle that are covered by its express
warranty. During the period of 18 months
from original delivery of the vehicle or the
accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately
29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,
whichever occurs first, a reasonable number
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-
tion results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-
tion has been subject to repair two or
more times, and you have directly noti-
fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing
of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-
tion of a less serious nature than cate-
gory (1) has been subject to repair four or
more times
and you hav
e directly notified
us in writing of the need for its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
all the necessary maintenance work which
should be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty Book-
let with you when you bring the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-
vice advisor will record every service for you
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Breakdown assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our
agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-
tance" section in the Service and Warranty
booklet (Canada). You will find both in your
vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of a change of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-
ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-
tacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
24
Introduction
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
R
service facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
R
unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic con-
verter.
R
the fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
for delivery in Europe through our European
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
nance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
!
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
R
the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
R
you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb or a hole in the road
R
a heavy object strikes the undercarriage
or parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under-
carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in this
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
Introduction
25
Z
an accident, no longer withstand the strain
they are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves,
grass or twigs can gather between the
underbody and the underbody paneling. If
these materials come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, they can catch
fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle
checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop. If on con-
tinuing your journey you notice that driving
safety is impaired, pull over and stop the
vehicle immediately, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. In such cases,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-
ation is subject to the following two condi-
tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-
ful interference, and 2) These devices must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired oper-
ation. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
devices must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
tics connection in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
!
If the engine is switched off and equip-
ment on the diagnostics connection is
used, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
connection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
requirements of the next emissions test dur-
ing the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-
fications to correctly carry out the work
required on your vehicle. This is especially the
case for work relevant to safety.
26
Introduction
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-
let.
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
work relevant to safety
R
service and maintenance work
R
repair work
R
alterations, installation work and modifica-
tions
R
work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or
others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driv-
ing your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
the vehicle technical data
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-
tact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-
ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
!
Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
instructions is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Introduction
27
Z
QR codes for the rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate
rescue card for your vehicle. The current res-
cue card contains the most important infor-
mation about your vehicle in a compact form,
e.g. the routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under http://
portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/
content/asportal/en/communication/
informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data recording
This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic
information relating to vehicle operation, mal-
functions, and user settings. This may include
information about the performance or status
of various systems, including but not limited
to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-
tems, that is stored and can be read out with
suitable devices, particularly when the vehi-
cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to
properly diagnose and service your vehicle or
to further optimize and develop vehicle func-
tions.
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain
situations, and the location of the vehicle may
be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace
system.
For additional information please refer to the
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace
Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed
in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as during air bag deployment or when
hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
how various systems in your vehicle are
operating
R
whether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts are fastened
R
how far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
how fast the vehicle is traveling
This data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, can
combine the EDR data with the type of per-
sonal identification data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforce-
ment, can read the information by accessing
the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the
Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
28
Introduction
("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-
bility arising from the extraction of this infor-
mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-
sonnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law
enforcement; by federal, state or local gov-
ernment; in connection with or arising out of
litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries
and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with,
altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-
ponent may result in a malfunction of the
Restraint System Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
ted. This means that in the event of such con-
flict, the federal regulation governs. As of
February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws
relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Introduction
29
Z
30
Cockpit ................................................. 32
Instrument cluster .............................. 33
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35
Center console .................................... 37
Overhead control panel ...................... 39
Door control panel .............................. 40
Rear seats ............................................ 41
31
At a glance
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Steering wheel paddle
shifters
163
;
Combination switch 126
=
Horn
?
Instrument cluster 33
A
DIRECT SELECT lever 159
B
Overhead control panel 39
C
Control panel for:
Ü Lowering the rear
seat head restraints
110
u Extending/retracting
the rear roller sunblind
306
Moving the seat-belt
extender forwards
48
PASSENGER AIR BAG indi-
cator lamp
45
Setting the brightness of
the instrument cluster light-
ing and the COMAND dis-
play
D
Climate control systems 136
Function Page
E
Ignition lock 151
Start/Stop button 151
F
Adjusts the steering wheel 114
Steering wheel heating 115
G
Cruise control lever 180
H
Electric parking brake 172
I
Diagnostics connection 26
J
Opens the hood 324
K
Light switch 124
L
Control panel for:
Activating Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot
190
Switching on Active Lane
Keeping Assist
225
Deactivating PARKTRONIC 199
Switching on the 360° cam-
era
211
Activating Night View
Assist
219
Switching on the head-up
display
233
32
Cockpit
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Displays
Function Page
:
Speedometer
;
Multifunction display 232
=
Tachometer 230
?
Coolant temperature 231
Function Page
A
Fuel gauge
Fuel filler flap location indi-
cator 8: the fuel filler
cap is on the right-hand
side.
i
Information on displaying the outside
temperature in the multifunction display
can be found under "Outside temperature
display" (
Y page 231).
Instrument cluster
33
At a glance
Warning and indicator lamps
Function Page
:
! ABS
288
;
å ESP
®
OFF
290
÷ ESP
®
290
=
# Turn signal, left
126
?
L Low-beam head-
lamps
125
A
K High-beam head-
lamps
126
B
T Parking lamps,
license plate lamps and
instrument cluster lighting
125
C
! Turn signal, right
126
D
· Distance warning sig-
nal
296
Function Page
E
! Electric parking brake
(yellow)
292
F
Electric parking brake (red) 292
F USA only
! Canada only
G
; Check Engine
293
H
Ð Power steering
298
I
Brakes (red) 287
$ USA only
J Canada only
J
ü Seat belt
285
K
6 Restraint system
292
L
h Tire pressure monitor
297
34
Instrument cluster
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 232
;
Sets the brightness of the
instrument cluster and the
displays (COMAND)
230
=
COMAND display (see the
separate operating instruc-
tions)
?
DVD changer or the single
DVD drive (see the separate
operating instructions)
A
Controller and buttons (see
the separate operating
instructions)
Function Page
B ~
Rejects or ends a call 241
Exits the telephone book/
redial memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
ó
Switches on the Voice Con-
trol System (see the sepa-
rate operating instructions)
Multifunction steering wheel
35
At a glance
Function Page
C ò
Opens the menu list
9:
Selects a menu or submenu
or scrolls through lists
231
a
Confirms a selection 231
Hides display messages 251
%
Back 231
ñ
Switches off the Voice Con-
trol System (see the sepa-
rate operating instructions)
36
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
Center console
Function Page
:
Switches COMAND on/off
(see the separate Opera-
tor's Manual)
;
Adjusts the volume/mute
(see the separate operating
instructions)
=
èECO start/stop func-
tion
157
?
Touchpad (see the separate
operating instructions)
Telephone keypad (see the
separate operating instruc-
tions)
A
É Sets the vehicle level 194,
197
B
Adjusts the suspension set-
tings
195,
197
C
Û Selects the drive pro-
gram/program selector
button
163
Ñ Selects the drive pro-
gram/program selector
button (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
163
Function Page
D
Back button (see the sepa-
rate operating instructions)
E
Seat adjustment button
(see the separate operating
instructions)
F
Navigation button (see the
separate operating instruc-
tions)
G
Radio button (see the sep-
arate operating instruc-
tions)
H
£ Hazard warning
lamps
126
I
Media button (see the sep-
arate operating instruc-
tions)
J
Telephone, address book
and Internet button (see
separate operating instruc-
tions)
Center console
37
At a glance
Function Page
K
Vehicle and system set-
tings button (see separate
operating instructions)
Function Page
L
COMAND controller (see
the separate operating
instructions)
38
Center console
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function Page
:
p Switches the left-
hand reading lamp on/off
129
;
| Switches the auto-
matic interior lighting con-
trol on/off
129
=
G SOS button (mbrace
system)
310
?
c Switches the front
interior lighting on/off
129
A
u Switches the rear
interior lighting on/off
129
B
p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off
129
C
ï MB Info call button
(mbrace system)
312
D
Eyeglasses compartment 301
E
Operates the roller sun-
blind for the panorama roof
101
Function Page
F
µ Operates MAGIC SKY
CONTROL
103
Vehicles without MAGIC
SKY CONTROL: operates
the roller sunblind for the
panorama roof
101
G
Buttons for the garage door
opener
318
H
Microphone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
telephone and the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating instruc-
tions
I
F Roadside Assistance
call button (mbrace sys-
tem)
311
Overhead control panel
39
At a glance
Door control panel
Function Page
:
s Seat ventilation
113
;
c Seat heating
111
=
w Adjusts the front-
passenger seat from the
driver's seat
108
?
r 45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and steer-
ing wheel
120
A
Adjusts the seats electri-
cally
108
B
7Zª\
Adjusts and folds the exte-
rior mirrors in/out electri-
cally
118
Function Page
C
W Opens/closes the
right side window
97
D
W Opens/closes the
rear right side window
97
E
p Opens/closes the
trunk lid
95
F
W Opens/closes the
rear left side window
97
G
Opens the door 89
H
%&Unlocks/locks
the vehicle
89
I
W Opens/closes the left
side window
97
40
Door control panel
At a glance
Rear seats
Function Page
:
Stowage box in the seat
backrest
302
Coolbox 308
;
Stowage compartment in
the rear seat armrest
302
Function Page
=
Cup holder 305
?
Stowage compartment in
the center console
302
Socket 307
Rear seats
41
At a glance
42
Useful information .............................. 44
Panic alarm .......................................... 44
Occupant safety .................................. 44
Children in the vehicle ........................ 62
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67
Driving safety systems ....................... 67
Protection against theft ..................... 78
43
Safety
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Panic alarm
X
To activate: press ! button : for at
least one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X
To deactivate: press ! button :
again.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of
vehicle occupants coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of
an accident. The restraint system can also
reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants
are subjected during an accident.
The restraint system comprises:
R
Seat belt system
R
Air bags
R
Child restraint system
R
Child seat securing systems
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(
Y page 47)
R
have adjusted their seat and head restraint
properly (
Y page 107).
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the cor-
rect driver's seat position (
Y page 106).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (
Y page 50).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air
bag increases the level of protection for vehi-
cle occupants in the event of an accident. For
example, if, in the event of an accident, the
protection offered by the seat belt is suffi-
cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an
accident occurs, only the air bags that
increase protection in that particular accident
situation are deployed. However, seat belts
and air bags generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the out-
side.
Information on restraint system operation
can be found under "Triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"
(
Y page 59).
For more information about children traveling
with you in the vehicle and on child restraint
systems, see "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 62).
44
Occupant safety
Safety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details. USA only: for further information con-
tact our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and
at regular intervals while the engine is run-
ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-
ted in good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni-
tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a
few seconds after the vehicle is started. The
components of the restraint system are in
operational readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6
restraint system warning lamp:
R
does not light up after the ignition is
switched on
R
does not go out after a few seconds with
the engine running
R
lights up again while the engine is running
G
WARNING
If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint
system components may be triggered unin-
tentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with a high rate of
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS).
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the
front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,
in the event of an accident, all deployment
criteria are met, the front-passenger front
air bag is deployed.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the
front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
ted. It will then not be deployed in the event
of an accident.
Depending on the person in the front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air
bag must either be deactivated or enabled;
see the following points. You must make sure
of this both before and during a journey.
R
Children in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the
installed child restraint system, and the age
Occupant safety
45
Safety
Z
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to
observe the notes on the "Occupant Clas-
sification System (OCS)" (
Y page 53) and
on "Children in the vehicle" (
Y page 62).
There you will also find instructions on rear-
ward and forward-facing child restraint sys-
tems on the front-passenger seat.
R
All other persons: depending on the clas-
sification of the person in the front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger front
air bag is enabled or deactivated
(
Y page 53). Be sure to observe the notes
on "Seat belts“ (
Y page 46) and "Air bags"
(
Y page 50). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occu-
pants in the event of an accident or the vehi-
cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi-
cle occupants coming into contact with parts
of the vehicle interior or being ejected from
the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps
to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi-
tion in relation to the air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
R
Seat belts
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices and seat
belt force limiters
If the seat belt is pulled by the seat belt
extender quickly or with a jerky movement,
the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot
be extracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens
the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt
close against the body. However it does not
pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction
of the backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
correct an incorrect seat position or the rout-
ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps
to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
the vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
are synchronized with the front air bags,
which absorb part of the decelerat
ion force.
This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi-
cle occupants during an accident.
!
If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle
of the front-passenger seat. This may oth-
erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device in the event of an
accident, which will then need to be
replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
tems is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
their seat belts before starting the journey.
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-
not protect as intended. Furthermore, an
incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-
tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat
belt.
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
46
Occupant safety
Safety
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G
WARNING
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for
example, in an accident, during braking or an
abrupt change of direction. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint
systems.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz
vehicle. The child restraint system must be
appropriate to the age, weight and size of
the child
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-
tion of this Operator's Manual
(
Y page 62) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions
R
be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
tion system (OCS)" (
Y page 53)
G
WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
protective function if:
R
they are damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleach or dyed
R
the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
fied
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-
fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,
e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or
fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(
Y page 46).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
seat belt correctly before beginning the jour-
ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-
pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-
rectly while the vehicle is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make
sure that:
R
the seat belt tongue is only inserted to the
belt buckle belonging to that seat.
R
the seat belt is tight across your body.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
R
the seat belt is not twisted.
Occupant safety
47
Safety
Z
Only then can the forces which occur be
distributed over the area of the belt.
R
the shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be
routed under your arm.
R
the lap belt passes tightly and as low down
as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo-
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt
down to your hip joint and pull it tight using
the shoulder section of the belt.
R
the seat belt is not routed across sharp,
pointed or fragile objects.
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,
store these in a suitable place.
R
only one person is using a seat belt at a
time.
Infants and children must never travel sit-
ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the
event of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat
belt.
R
objects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants.
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cush-
ions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,
luggage or loads (
Y page 300).
Fastening seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(
Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (
Y page 47).
G
WARNING
If the seat-belt extender is extended during
the journey, the seat belt is not fitted properly
on the body. The seat belt can then no longer
perform its intended protective function. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Always make sure that the seat-belt extender
is retracted during a journey.
Seat-belt extender
The seat-belt extender for the driver and front
passenger helps you fasten your seat belt.
Seat-belt extender = is extended when the
respective door is closed and the SmartKey is
turned to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
You can also extend seat-belt extender =
with seat-belt extender button ?.
48
Occupant safety
Safety
X
Press seat-belt extender button ?.
Seat-belt extender = extends.
Seat-belt extender = is retracted again if:
R
the belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt
buckle.
R
the belt tongue is not engaged in the seat
belt buckle within 60 seconds.
In this case, you can extend seat-belt
extender = again. Press seat-belt
extender button ? again.
R
the respective door is opened.
R
the SmartKey is turned to position 0 in the
ignition lock.
R
you release the seat backrest and fold it
forwards.
R
the front-passenger seat is unoccupied
after approximately five seconds.
If you press seat-belt extender button ?
after this, seat-belt extender = will not
extend.
Basic illustration
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 106).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
vertical position.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-belt
extender = and engage belt tongue ;
into belt buckle :.
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
front-passenger seat may be tightened
automatically, see "Belt adjustment"
(
Y page 50).
X
If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found
under "Special seat belt retractor"
(
Y page 63).
Releasing seat belts
!
Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Basic illustration
X
Press release button :, hold belt
tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards
seat-belt extender =.
Occupant safety
49
Safety
Z
Seat belt adjustment
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE
®
convenience function. This
function adjusts the driver's and front-
passenger seat belt to the upper body of the
occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
R
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle
when the seat-belt extender is retracted
and
R
the ignition is switched on
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
retraction force if any slack is detected
between the vehicle occupant and the seat
belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting.
You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on
and off using COMAND. Information on acti-
vating and deactivating the seat-belt adjust-
ment function can be found in the Digital
Operator's Manual.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle
occupants must wear their seat belts. It may
light up continuously or flash. In addition,
there may be a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt
has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up for six seconds each
time the engine is started. If, after
six seconds, the driver or front-passenger
seat belt has not been fastened and the doors
are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up. As soon as the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are fastened or a front
door is opened again, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is
fastened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a
warning tone sounds. A warning tone also
sounds with increasing intensity for
60 seconds or until the driver or front
passenger have fastened their seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt
warning is activated again.
i
For more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat
belts" (
Y page 285).
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an air bag can be rec-
ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.
An air bag complements the correctly fas-
tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat
belt. The air bag provides additional protec-
tion in applicable accident situations.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
The different air bag systems function inde-
pendently from one another (
Y page 59).
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
50
Occupant safety
Safety
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
R
are sitting correctly and maintain the great-
est possible distance to the air bags
R
follow the following instructions
Always make sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
pants.
R
Adjust the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the
seat is in an almost upright position. The
center of the head restraint must support
the head at about eye level.
R
Move the driver's and front-passenger
seats as far back as possible. The driver's
seat position must allow the vehicle to be
driven safely.
R
Only hold the steering wheel on the out-
side. This allows the air bag to be fully
deployed.
R
Always lean against the backrest while driv-
ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against
the door or side window. You may other-
wise be in the deployment area of the air
bags.
R
Always keep your feet in the footwell in
front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the
dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-
erwise be in the deployment area of the air
bag.
R
For this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
cannot be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
R
Always secure children under twelve years
of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in
suitable child restraint systems.
R
Child restraint systems should be installed
on the rear seats.
R
Only secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat when the front-passenger
front air bag is deactivated. If the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
permanently
lit, th
e front-passenger front
air bag is deactivated (
Y page 45).
R
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS)" (
Y page 53) and on "Children
in the vehicle" (
Y page 62) in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-
vent an air bag from functioning correctly.
Before starting your journey and to avoid risks
resulting from the speed of the air bag as it
deploys, make sure that:
R
there are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Do not place any objects on the dashboard
e.g. above the front-passenger front air
bag.
R
there are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
R
no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
the grab handles or coat hooks.
R
no accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deploy-
ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side
windows, rear side trim or side walls.
R
no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects
are in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable pla
ce.
G
WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it.
Occupant safety
51
Safety
Z
G
WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per-
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Front air bags
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel. Front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the
occupants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps
inform you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (
Y page 45).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
R
the system, based on the OCS weight sen-
sor readings, detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied (
Y page 53).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp is lit (
Y page 54)
R
the restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Knee bags
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer-
ing column and front-passenger knee bag ;
under the glove box. The driver's and front-
passenger knee bags are triggered together
with the front air bags.
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection for the occupants in the front seats.
Side impact air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
52
Occupant safety
Safety
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers
additional pelvis protection for occupants in
the front seats. However, it does not protect
the:
R
head
R
neck
R
arms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
impact occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side (front) deploys under the fol-
lowing conditions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
R
the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-
dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-
ment is independent of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied or not.
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags : are integrated
into the side of the roof frame and deployed in
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or
arms.
In the event of a side impact, the window cur-
tain air bag is deployed on the side on which
the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
(
Y page 59).
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
categorizes the person in the front-passenger
seat. Depending on that result, the front-
passenger front air bag and front-passenger
knee bag are either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
R
the side impact air bag
R
the window curtain air bag
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices
Occupant safety
53
Safety
Z
Prerequisite
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
R
with the seat belt fastened correctly
R
in an almost upright position with their
back against the seat backrest
R
with their feet resting on the floor, if possi-
ble
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classi-
fication, e.g. because the front passenger:
R
transfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest
R
sits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
be sure to observe the correct positioning of
the child restraint system. Never place
objects under or behind the child restraint
system, e.g. cushions. Fully retract the seat
cushion length. The entire base of the child
restraint system must always rest on the seat
cushion of the front-passenger seat. The
backrest of the forward-facing child restraint
system must lie as flat as possible against the
backrest of the front-passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-
rest and the head restraint position accord-
ingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
Occupant Classification System opera-
tion (OCS)
:
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
;
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
enabled.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,
or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps
must light up simultaneously for approx-
imately six seconds.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the
front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,
in the event of an accident, all deployment
criteria are met, the front-passenger front
air bag is deployed.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the
front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
ted. It will then not be deployed in the event
of an accident.
If the status of the front-passenger front air
bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an
air bag display message appears in the instru-
ment cluster (
Y page 264). When the front-
passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-
tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be
aware of the status of the front-passenger
54
Occupant safety
Safety
front air bag both before and during the jour-
ney.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the front-
passenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
R
the person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag
may deploy in an accident. The child could be
struck by the air bag. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a rearward-facing child restraint system on
the front-passenger seat. You can find more
information on OCS under "Problems with the
Occupant Classification System"
(
Y page 58).
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat too
close to the dashboard, in the event of an
accident, the child could:
R
come into contact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON is lit up
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible and fully retract the seat
cushion length. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the vehicle seat-belt extender to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the retracted seat-belt
extender. If necessary, adjust the front-
passenger seat accordingly. Always observe
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions.
If OCS determines that:
R
the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and
remains lit. This indicates that the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in a stand-
ard child restraint system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after
the system self-test and remains lit. This
indicates that the front-passenger front air
bag is deactivated.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
child, in a standard child restraint system,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up
permanently after the system self-test. This
indicates that the front-passenger front air
Occupant safety
55
Safety
Z
bag is activated. The result of the classifi-
cation is dependent on, among other fac-
tors, the child restraint system and the
child's stature. It is recommended that you
install the child restraint system on a suit-
able rear seat.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager
or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp lights up and remains lit after
the system self-test depending on the
result of the classification.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp lights up, move the front-passenger
seat as far back as possible. Alterna-
tively, a person of smaller stature can sit
on a rear seat.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of a stature correspond-
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the
system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag
is activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure
to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-
cle" (
Y page 62).
When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6
restraint system warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.
The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
ted in this case and does not deploy during an
accident. Have the system checked by quali-
fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
front-passenger seat should only be repaired
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-
essary repair work carried out at an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
For safet
y reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessories
that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
will also deploy. The Occupant Classification
System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that
result, the front-passenger front air bag is
either enabled or deactivated.
System self-test
G
DANGER
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
not light up during the system self-test, the
system is malfunctioning. The front-
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
in the event of an accident with high deceler-
ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
be used. Do not install a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
G
DANGER
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
this case, the front-passenger front air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func-
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
56
Occupant safety
Safety
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
indicator lamp display the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (
Y page 54).
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (
Y page 58).
Occupant safety
57
Safety
Z
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator
lamp lights up and
remains lit, even
though the front-
passenger seat is occu-
pied by an adult or a
person of a stature cor-
responding to that of an
adult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is
incorrect.
X
Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-
son on the front-passenger seat are met (
Y page 54).
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
front-passenger seat may not be used.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator
lamp does not light up
and/or does not stay
on.
The front-passenger
seat is:
R
unoccupied
R
occupied with the
weight of a child up
to twelve months old
in a child restraint
system
OCS is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
child seat.
X
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as pos-
sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec-
essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X
Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
X
When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-
passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X
Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X
Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/
or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not
install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is
recommended that you install the child restraint system on a
suitable rear seat.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
58
Occupant safety
Safety
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G
WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air
bags continue to perform their protective
function for the vehicle occupants in the
event of a crash.
G
WARNING
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer opera-
tional and are unable to perform their inten-
ded protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices which have been triggered
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE
®
to
trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz-
ardous situations. This procedure is reversi-
ble.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-
gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
be released. The 6 restraint system warn-
ing lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
hearing. The powder that is released gener-
ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it
may cause short-term breathing difficulties in
people with asthma or other respiratory prob-
lems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of
the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-
rial, which ma
y require special handling and
regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In
California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the
restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-
ation or acceleration, such as:
R
duration
R
direction
R
intensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the
Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-
tal or rear collision.
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
the components of the restraint system are
operational; see "Restraint system warning
lamp" (
Y page 45)
R
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
the respective front-passenger seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the
rear compartment are triggered independ-
ently of the lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
Occupant safety
59
Safety
Z
the restraint system are activated independ-
ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
R
Front air bags as well as driver's and front-
passenger knee bags
R
Window curtain air bag, if the system deter-
mines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
The front-passenger front air bag is activated
or deactivated depending on the person on
the front-passenger seat. The front-
passenger front air bag can only deploy in an
accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi-
cator lamp is lit. Observe the information on
the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
(
Y page 45).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.
During the first deployment stage, the front
air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce
the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully
deployed with the maximum amount of pro-
pellant gas if a second deployment threshold
is reached within a few milliseconds.
The activation threshold of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-
mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-
eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-
ous p
oints in the vehicle. This process is pre-
emptive in nature. Deployment should take
place in good time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-
tion and the direction of the force are essen-
tially determined by:
R
the distribution of forces during the colli-
sion
R
the collision angle
R
the deformation characteristics of the vehi-
cle
R
the characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag.
Nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably,
without an air bag being deployed. This is the
case if only parts which are relatively easily
deformed are affected and the rate of decel-
eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may
be deployed even though the vehicle suffers
only minor deformation. This is the case if, for
example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-
gitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
deceleration occurs as a result.
If th
e restraint system control unit detects a
side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the
applicable components of the restraint sys-
tem are activated independently of each
other depending on the apparent type of acci-
dent.
R
Side impact air bags on the side of impact,
independently of the Emergency Tension-
ing Device and the use of the seat belt on
the driver's seat and in the rear compart-
ment seats
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side (front) deploys under the
following conditions:
-
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
-
the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle of the front-passenger seat
R
Window curtain air bag on the side of
impact, independently of the use of the
seat belt and independently of whether the
front-passenger seat is occupied
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys-
tem determines that deployment can offer
additional protection in this situation
R
Window curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided b
y the
seat belt
i
Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-
dent. The different air bag systems work
independently of each other.
60
Occupant safety
Safety
How the air bag system works is deter-
mined by the severity of the accident detec-
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or
acceleration and the apparent type of acci-
dent:
R
frontal collision
R
side impact
R
rollover
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection system)
Introduction
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE
®
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the
vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is a dan-
ger that the seats and/or objects could be
damaged when PRE-SAFE
®
is activated.
Despite your vehicle being equipped with the
PRE-SAFE
®
system, the possibility of per-
sonal injuries occurring as a result of an acci-
dent cannot be eliminated. Always adapt your
driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care-
fully.
Function
PRE-SAFE
®
intervenes:
R
in emergency braking situations, e.g. when
BAS is activated
R
in critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle
understeers or oversteers severely
R
vehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-
age: when a driver assistance system inter-
venes powerfully or the radar sensor sys-
tem detects an imminent danger of colli-
sion in certain situations
PRE-SAFE
®
takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detec-
ted:
R
the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
R
if the vehicle skids, the side windows are
closed so that only a small gap remains.
R
if the vehicle skids, the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel and the side win-
dows are closed so that only a small gap
remains.
R
the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is
in an unfavorable position.
R
vehicles with a multicontour seat: the air
pressure in the side bolsters of the seat
backrest is increased.
If the hazardous situation passes without
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE
®
slackens
the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with mul-
ticontour seats, the air pressure in the side
bolsters is reduced again. All settings made
by PRE-SAFE
®
can then be reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
X
Move the seat backrest or seat back
slightly when the vehicle is stationary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is re
leased.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE
®
convenience function. Infor-
mation about the convenience function can
be found under "Belt adjustment"
(
Y page 50).
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory occu-
pant protection system PLUS)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-
end collision is imminent. In certain hazard-
ous situations, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS takes pre-
Occupant safety
61
Safety
Z
emptive measures to protect the vehicle
occupants.
Important safety notes
The intervention of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS cannot
prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS intervenes.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS does not intervene if the
vehicle is backing up.
When driving, or when parking or exiting a
parking space with assistance from Active
Parking Assist, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS will not
apply the brakes.
Function
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
tions if the radar sensor system detects an
imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS takes the following meas-
ures depending on the hazardous situation
detected:
R
if the radar sensor system detects that a
head-on collision is imminent, the seat
belts are pre-tensioned.
R
if the radar sensor system detects that a
rear-end collision is imminent:
-
the brake pressure is increased if the
driver applies the brakes when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
-
the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
The PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS braking application is
canceled:
R
if the accelerator pedal is depressed when
a gear is engaged
R
if the risk of a collision passes or is no lon-
ger detected
R
if DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention
to pull away
If the hazardous situation passes without
resulting in an accident, the original settings
are restored.
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on
the type and severity of the impact:
R
the hazard warning lamps are activated
R
the emergency lighting is activated
R
the vehicle doors are unlocked
R
the front side windows are lowered
R
the electrically adjustable steering wheel is
raised
R
the engine is switched off and the fuel sup-
ply is cut off
R
vehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-
gency call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil-
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
that you install a child restraint system on a
rear seat. Children are generally better pro-
tected there.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles. The child restraint system must be
appropriate to the age, weight and size of
the child
R
be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes in this section in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions
R
be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes on the "Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS)" (
Y page 53)
62
Children in the vehicle
Safety
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
ting properly. Particular attention must be
paid to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (
Y page 47).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a three-point seat belt can be properly fas-
tened without a booster seat.
Special seat belt retractor
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-
er's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat
belt retractor. When activated, the special
seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt
cannot slacken once the child seat is secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Pull the front seat belt smoothly out of the
seat-belt extender and the rear seat belt
out of the belt sash guide.
X
Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
belt retractor is enabled.
X
Push the child restraint system down so
that the seat belt is tight and does not
loosen.
Children in the vehicle
63
Safety
Z
Removing the child restraint system and
deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle, hold the seat belt tongue and route
it to the seat belt extender in front or the
belt sash guide in the rear compartment.
The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
ted.
Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
tems is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
that the base of the child restraint system is
always resting completely on the seat cush-
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
or behind the child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child
restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading
guidelines" (
Y page 300).
G
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
tems which have been damaged or subjected
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ing systems on the child restraint system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system
again.
The securing systems of child restraint sys-
tems are:
R
the seat belt system
R
the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
R
the Top Tether anchorages (Coupe only)
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe
the information on the "Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS)" (
Y page 53). There you
will also find information on deactivating the
front-passenger front air bag.
64
Children in the vehicle
Safety
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
ards 213 and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
corresponds to the standards can be found
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found
in the installation instructions that are inclu-
ded with the child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-
ing system
G
WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems with which the child is also secured
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
child restraint system with the Top Tether
belt, if available.
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the
child restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is
engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) securing rings
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ; on the
rear seats are covered by folding upholstered
lining = with Velcro fastening.
X
Fold upholstered lining = upwards.
X
Turn support : by 90°.
Upholstered lining = remains folded
upwards.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) securing rings ;.
After you have removed the LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) child restraint system, you must turn
support : on upholstered lining = by 90°
again. Then fold upholstery lining = down.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings ; for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child
seat according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount
and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of
injury even further. If the child restraint sys-
Children in the vehicle
65
Safety
Z
tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this
should always be used.
Top Tether anchorages
The Top Tether anchorage points are installed
in the rear compartment behind the head
restraints on the parcel shelf.
X
Move head restraint : upwards.
X
Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
=.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Always
comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions
when doing so.
X
Route Top Tether belt A under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X
Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt
A into Top Tether anchorage =.
Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not
twisted.
X
Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X
Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchor-
age =.
X
If necessary, move head restraint : back
down again slightly (
Y page 110). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the cor-
rect routing of Top Tether belt A.
Child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil-
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
that you install the child restraint system on a
rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
be sure to read and follow the instructions
and safety notes on the "Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS)" (
Y page 53).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise
as a result of:
R
an incorrectly categorized person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the unintentional deactivation of the front-
passenger front air bag
R
the unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
board
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-
ward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, always make sure that
the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit (
Y page 45)
is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
ted.
66
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible. Fully retract the seat cush-
ion length. The entire base of the child
restraint system must always rest on the seat
cushion of the front-passenger seat. The
backrest of the child restraint system must lie
as flat as possible against the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. The child restraint sys-
tem must not touch the roof or be subjected
to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the
angle of the seat backrest and the head
restraint position accordingly. Always make
sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly
routed from the front-passenger seat-belt
extender to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
must be routed forwards from the retracted
seat-belt extender for the front-passenger
seat.
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Pets in the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
R
activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R
activate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
Unsecured animals could also be flung around
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
port box.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(
Y page 68)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 68)
R
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with
Cross-Traffic Assist (
Y page 69)
R
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(distance warning function and Adaptive
Brake Assist) (
Y page 70)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(
Y page 73)
R
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(
Y page 75)
R
ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 75)
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake (Y page 75)
R
STEER CONTROL (Y page 77)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you
are inattentive, the driving safety systems can
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
override the laws of physics. Driving safety
systems are merely aids designed to assist
driving. You are responsible for maintaining
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time, and for stay-
ing in lane. Always adapt your driving style to
suit the prevailing road and weather condi-
tions and maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Driving safety systems
67
Safety
Z
The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there is
adequate contact between the tires and the
road surface. Please pay special attention to
the notes on tires, recommended minimum
tire tread depths, etc. (
Y page 362).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow
chains. Only in this way will the driving safety
systems described in this section work as
effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
cle when braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
when you only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
G
WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (
Y page 288) and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (
Y page 252).
Braking
X
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
uation is over.
X
To make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-
tions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
thus shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
G
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
68
Driving safety systems
Safety
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
General information
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of
a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and
reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS
PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are
assisted when braking.
i
Pay attention to the important safety
notes in the "Driving safety systems" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with
the Driving Assistance Plus package.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
radar sensor system and the camera system
must be operational.
With the help of a sensor system and a cam-
era system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:
R
that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time
R
that cross the path of your vehicle
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected.
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typi-
cal characteristics such as the body contours
and posture of a person standing upright.
If the radar sensor system or the camera sys-
tem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions
are restricted or no longer available. The
brake system is still available with complete
brake boosting effect and BAS.
i
Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" sec-
tion“ (
Y page 69).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-
ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-
ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these
cases. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
BAS PLUS does not react:
R
to small people, e.g. children
R
to animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
when cornering
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
also impaired in the event of:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle traveling in front on a different line
R
vehicles quickly moving into the radar sen-
sor system detection range
Driving safety systems
69
Safety
Z
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
R
dirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-
ered
R
there is glare on the camera system, e.g.
from the sun being low in the sky
R
darkness
R
if:
-
pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle
-
the camera system no longer recognizes
a pedestrian as a person due to special
clothing or other objects
-
a pedestrian is concealed by other
objects
-
the typical outline of a person is not dis-
tinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
sions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera
system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Function
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
brake force necessary if:
R
you approach an obstacle, and
R
BAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake
pressure will be carried out at the last possi-
ble moment.
When driving at a speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the
brake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-
fic situation.
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-
ardous situations with vehicles in front within
a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and
155 mph (250 km/h).
At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to:
R
stationary objects in the path of your vehi-
cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
R
pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
R
objects crossing your path and that are
recognized in the detection range of the
sensors
i
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high
braking force, preventative passenger pro-
tection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
) are activa-
ted simultaneously.
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situati
on is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
tion as usual again, if:
R
you release the brake pedal.
R
there is no longer a risk of collision.
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle.
R
you depress the accelerator pedal.
R
you activate kickdown.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS
General information
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con-
sists of a distance warning function with an
autonomous braking function and adaptive
Brake Assist.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can
help you to minimize the risk of a front-end
collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the
effects of such a collision.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
will be warned visually and acoustically. If you
70
Driving safety systems
Safety
do not react to the visual and audible collision
warning, autonomous braking can be initiated
in critical situations. If you apply the brake
yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake
Assist assists you.
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is snow or heavy rain
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle traveling in front on a different line
R
new vehicles or after a service on the COL-
LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system
Observe the notes in the section on break-
ing-in (
Y page 150).
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
sions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle.
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with
a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such
a collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
will be warned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (
Y page 67).
G
WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
provide a warning in all critical situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and do not rely solely on the distance
warning function.
Function
X
To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate the distance warning function in the
on-board computer (
Y page 245).
If the distance warning function is not activa-
ted, the æ symbol appears in the assis-
tance graphics display.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
the distance warning function warns you if
you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound,
and the · distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X
Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Driving safety systems
71
Safety
Z
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
tions may also cause the system to display a
warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obsta-
cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h),
the distance warning function can also react
to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance
warning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-
SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist
with the autonomous braking function.
The autonomous braking function:
R
gives the driver more time to react to criti-
cal driving situations
R
can help the driver to avoid an accident or
R
reduces the effects of an accident
The autonomous braking function is available
in the following speed ranges:
R
from 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph
(105 km/h) for moving objects
R
from 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph
(50 km/h) for stationary objects
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously.
Adaptive Brake Assist
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
tance in hazardous situations at speeds
above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor
technology to assess the traffic situation.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-
vene.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system remains available with full
brake boosting effect and BAS.
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the
distance warning signal can detect obstacles
that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col-
lision with the vehicle in front, it calculates
the braking force necessary to avoid a colli-
sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-
tive Brake Assist will automatically increase
the braking force to a level suitable for the
traffic conditions.
72
Driving safety systems
Safety
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
R
you release the brake pedal.
R
there is no longer any danger of a collision.
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle.
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
high braking force, preventative passenger
protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
) are activa-
ted simultaneously.
Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
of reacting to moving objects that have
already been detected as such at least once
over the period of observation.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to
stationary obstacles.
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
ESP
®
monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between the tires and
the road surface.
If ESP
®
detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
keep the vehicle on the desired course within
physical limits. ESP
®
assists the driver when
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP
®
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
. On vehi-
cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP
®
.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is trans-
ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP
®
.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP
®
checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes
on ESP
®
(Y page 356) when towing the vehi-
cle with a raised rear axle.
ESP
®
is only deactivated if the å warning
lamp is lit continuously.
If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continu-
ously, ESP
®
is not available due to a malfunc-
tion.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(
Y page 290) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(
Y page 252).
Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP
®
function properly.
Characteristics of ESP
®
General information
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
beginning the journey, ESP
®
is automatically
active.
If ESP
®
intervenes, the ÷ ESP
®
warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
Driving safety systems
73
Safety
Z
If ESP
®
intervenes:
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum-
stances.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
stops moving. The engine starts automati-
cally when the driver wants to pull away again.
ESP
®
remains in its previously selected sta-
tus. Example: if ESP
®
was deactivated before
the engine was switched off, ESP
®
remains
deactivated when the engine is switched on
again.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
You can select between the following states
of ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the fol-
lowing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-
cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
starts to spin.
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
You can deactivate or activate ESP
®
via the
on-board computer (
Y page 74).
ESP
®
deactivated:
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
ESP
®
activated:
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tions, ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability.
R
engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
ting action for better traction on loose sur-
faces.
R
traction control is still activated.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Crosswind Assist (vehicles without
MAGIC BODY CONTROL)
General information
Vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL: infor-
mation on stabilizing the vehicle in the event
of crosswind (
Y page 194).
Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to
deviate from a straight course. The crosswind
driving assistance function integrated into
ESP
®
significantly reduces these effects.
74
Driving safety systems
Safety
ESP
®
intervenes automatically according to
the direction and intensity of the crosswinds
affecting your vehicle.
ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to
assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving
straight ahead or cornering gently.
Important safety notes
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP
®
is
deactivated or disabled because of a mal-
function.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
stability while braking.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
G
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (
Y page 288) as well as dis-
play messages (
Y page 255).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
and offers increased braking comfort. In addi-
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
also has the HOLD function (
Y page 192)and
hill start assist (
Y page 155).
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
General information
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake can help you to minimize
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a
pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a
collision. If PRE-SAFE
®
Brake has detected a
risk of collision, you will be warned visually
and acoustically as well as by automatic brak-
ing.
i
Pay attention to the important safety
notes in the "Driving safety systems" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
PRESAFE
®
Brake is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance Plus package.
For PRE-SAFE
®
Brake to assist you when driv-
ing, the radar sensor system and the camera
system must be switched on and be opera-
tional.
With the help of the radar sensor system and
the camera system, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake can
detect obstacles that are in front of your vehi-
cle for an extended period of time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected.
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake detects pedestrians using
typical characteristics such as the body con-
tours and posture of a person standing
upright.
i
Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" sec-
tion“ (
Y page 75).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake will initially brake your vehi-
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a
danger of collision is detected. There may be
a collision unless you brake yourself. Even
after subsequent full application of the brakes
Driving safety systems
75
Safety
Z
a collision cannot always be avoided, partic-
ularly when approaching at too high a speed.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
In the event of a partial application of the
brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of
the full braking pressure.
G
WARNING
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
In these cases, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake may:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
not give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake warns you. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake cannot always clearly iden-
tify people, especially if they are moving. In
these cases, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake cannot inter-
vene. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake warns you.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-
lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
G
WARNING
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake does not react:
R
to small people, e.g. children
R
to animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
As a result, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake may neither
give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
also impaired in the event of:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
R
dirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-
ered
R
there is glare on the camera system, e.g.
from the sun being low in the sky
R
darkness
R
if:
-
pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle
-
the camera system no longer recognizes
a pedestrian as a person due to special
clothing or other objects
-
a pedestrian is concealed by other
objects
-
the typical outline of a person is not dis-
tinguishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, hav
e the configuration and operation of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
sions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera
76
Driving safety systems
Safety
system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Function
X
To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate PRE-SAFE
®
Brake in the on-board
computer (
Y page 245).
If the PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is not activated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction
display.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you rapidly
approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent
warning tone will then sound and the ·
distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
X
Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake can also brake the vehicle
automatically under the following conditions:
R
the driver and front-passenger have their
seat belts fastened
and
R
the vehicle speed is between approx-
imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph
(200 km/h)
At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE
®
Brake can also detect:
R
stationary objects in the path of your vehi-
cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
R
pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
i
If there is an increased risk of collision,
preventive passenger protection measures
(PRE-SAFE
®
) are activated.
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
may perform automatic emergency braking,
up to the point of full brake application. Auto-
matic emergency braking is not performed
until immediately prior to an imminent acci-
dent.
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
SAFE
®
Brake at any time by:
R
depressing the accelerator pedal further.
R
activating kickdown.
R
releasing the brake pedal.
The braking action of PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is
ended automatically if:
R
you maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
R
there is no longer a risk of collision.
R
there is no longer an obstacle detected in
front of your vehicle.
STEER CONTROL
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering
wheel in the direction required for vehicle
stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in partic-
ular if:
R
both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake.
R
the vehicle starts to skid.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 67).
No steering support is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
R
the lighting is faulty.
Power steering will, however, continue to
function.
Driving safety systems
77
Safety
Z
Protection against theft
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
X
To activate with the SmartKey: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X
To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-
one can start the engine if a valid SmartKey
has been left inside the vehicle.
i
The immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be star-
ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
X
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
tem is armed after approximately
10 seconds.
X
To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
R
a door
R
the vehicle with the mechanical key
R
the trunk lid
R
the hood
X
To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
X
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-
Key must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i
If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the Cus-
tomer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
78
Protection against theft
Safety
The emergency call system sends a mes-
sage or establishes a data connection pro-
vided that:
R
you have subscribed to the mbrace ser-
vice.
R
the mbrace service has been activated
properly.
R
the necessary mobile phone network is
available.
Protection against theft
79
Safety
Z
80
Useful information .............................. 82
SmartKey ............................................. 82
Doors .................................................... 89
Trunk .................................................... 92
Side windows ...................................... 97
Panorama roof ................................... 101
81
Opening and closing
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
!
Keep the SmartKey away from strong
magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the
SmartKey.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function:
do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf
or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may
not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine
using the Start/Stop button.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
R
when starting the engine
R
whilst driving
R
when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
R
when the external door handles are
touched
R
during convenience closing
82
SmartKey
Opening and closing
SmartKey functions
:
& To lock the vehicle
;
F To open/close the trunk lid
=
% To unlock the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press button =.
If you do not open the vehicle within
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
R
the vehicle is locked again.
R
the anti-theft alarm system is armed
again.
X
To lock centrally: press button :.
The key centrally locks/unlocks the following
components:
R
the doors
R
the trunk lid
R
the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
The visual and audible confirmation is given
upon locking only if all components were suc-
cessfully locked.
When the surround lighting is activated in
COMAND, it comes on when it is dark after
the vehicle is unlocked using the remote con-
trol. Information on activating and deactivat-
ing the surround lighting can be found in the
separate operating instructions.
X
To open the trunk lid automatically
from outside the vehicle: press and hold
button ; until the trunk lid opens.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
SmartKey in the vehicle.
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con-
ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by
using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it
using the & button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the
handle is used, must both be closed. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When
locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the
distance between the SmartKey and the cor-
responding door handle must not be greater
than 3 ft (1 m).
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
R
when starting the engine
R
whilst driving
R
when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
R
when the external door handles are
touched
R
during convenience closing
SmartKey
83
Opening and closing
Z
X
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-
face : or ;.
Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X
Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an exten-
ded period.
Further information on the convenience
closing feature (
Y page 99).
Deactivating
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an
extended period of time, you can deactivate
the KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey.
The SmartKey will then use very little power,
thereby conserving battery power. For the
purposes of activation/deactivation, the
vehicle must not be nearby.
X
To deactivate: press the & button on
the SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
flashes twice briefly and lights up once,
then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated .
X
To activate: press any button on the
SmartKey or insert the SmartKey into the
ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-
tures are available again.
KEYLESS-GO start function
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
SmartKey in the vehicle.
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking
system. This means that only the driver's door
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-
quently travel on your own.
X
To change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice
(
Y page 86).
i If the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the vehi-
cle, pressing the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X
To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
X
To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton twice.
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
lows:
X
To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
X
To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
face of the front-passenger door handle.
X
To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X
To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for
app
roximately six sec-
84
SmartKey
Opening and closing
onds until the battery check lamp flashes
twice (
Y page 86).
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(
Y page 78).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
automatically.
X
To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
X
Push release catch : in the direction of
the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
R
unlocking the driver's door (Y page 90)
R
unlocking the trunk (Y page 96)
R
locking the vehicle (Y page 91)
Inserting the mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completely into
the SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
SmartKey
85
Opening and closing
Z
Checking the battery
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X
Change the battery (Y page 86).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
i
You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (
Y page 85).
X
Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X
Remove battery compartment cover :.
X
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X
Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
X
Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Insert the front tabs of battery compart-
ment cover : into the housing first and
then press to close it.
X
Insert mechanical key ; into the Smart-
Key.
X
Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
86
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You can no longer lock
or unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 86) and replace it if nec-
essary (
Y page 86).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X
Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock
or unlock the vehicle
using KEYLESS-GO.
KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.
X
Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 83).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 86) and replace it if nec-
essary (
Y page 86).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
X
Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
SmartKey
87
Opening and closing
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine cannot be
started using the
SmartKey.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(
Y page 349).
or
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 351).
or
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Start/
Stop button. The
SmartKey is in the vehi-
cle.
The vehicle is locked.
X
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 86) and replace it if nec-
essary (
Y page 86).
If this does not work:
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart-
Key.
X
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
88
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Doors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(
Y page 300).
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
i
When a door is opened, the side window
on that side opens slightly. When the door
is closed, the side window closes again.
!
The side windows will not open/close if
the battery is discharged or if the side win-
dows have iced up. It will then not be pos-
sible to close the door. Do not attempt to
force the door closed. You could otherwise
damage the door or the side window.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has
been locked with the SmartKey or with KEY-
LESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off
the alarm (
Y page 78).
X
Pull door handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
up. The door is unlocked and opens.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle
from the inside. The buttons are located on
both doors.
X
To unlock: press button :.
X
To lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle locks.
If the driver's door is open, the door stays
unlocked.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
Doors
89
Opening and closing
Z
The doors can be opened from the inside.
If the vehicle has been locked with the Smart-
Key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from
the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem. Switch off the alarm (
Y page 78).
i If a locked door is opened from the inside,
the previous unlock status of the vehicle
will be taken into consideration if:
R
the vehicle was locked using the locking
button for the central locking, or
R
if the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked. If only the
driver's door had been previously
unlocked, only the door which has been
opened from the inside is unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
X
To deactivate: press and hold button :
for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X
To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
i
If you press one of the two buttons and do
not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
You could therefore be locked out if:
R
the vehicle is being pushed.
R
the vehicle is being towed.
R
the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
i
You can switch the automatic locking
function on and off using COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
Power closing
Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid
into their locks automatically even if they are
only partly closed.
X
To power close a door: push the door into
the lock up to the first detent position.
Power closing will pull the door fully closed.
X
To power close the trunk lid: lightly push
the trunk lid closed.
The power closing function pulls the trunk
lid closed.
Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-
ical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (
Y page 85).
X
Insert the mechanical key into opening :
in the protective cap.
X
Pull and hold the door handle.
X
Pull the protective cap on the mechanical
key as straight as possible away from the
vehicle until it releases.
X
Release the door handle.
90
Doors
Opening and closing
X
Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
as far as it will go to position 1.
The locking knob pops up and the door
unlocks.
X
Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key (
Y page 85).
X
Carefully press the protective cap onto the
lock cylinder until it engages and is seated
firmly. Do not pull the door handle when
doing so.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(
Y page 78).
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-
cal key.
X
Open the driver's door.
X
Close the front-passenger door and the
trunk lid.
X
Press the locking button (Y page 89).
X
Check whether the locking knob on the
front-passenger door is still visible. Press
the locking knob down by hand, if neces-
sary.
X
Close the driver's door.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (
Y page 85).
X
Insert the mechanical key into opening :
in the protective cap.
X
Pull and hold the door handle.
X
Pull the protective cap on the mechanical
key as straight as possible away from the
vehicle until it releases.
X
Release the door handle.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as
it will go to position 1.
The locking knob drops down and the driv-
er's door is locked.
X
Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X
Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
are locked.
Doors
91
Opening and closing
Z
X
Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key (
Y page 85).
X
Carefully press the protective cap onto the
lock cylinder until it engages and is seated
firmly. Do not pull the door handle when
doing so.
i
If you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
theft alarm system is not armed.
Trunk
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i
You can limit the opening angle of the
trunk lid in COMAND; see the separate
operating instructions.
i
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 406).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(
Y page 300).
Obstacle recognition with trunk lid
reversing feature
On vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-
ture, the trunk lid is equipped with automatic
obstacle recognition with reversing feature. If
a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid
when automatically opening or closing, this
procedure is stopped. If the trunk lid is stop-
ped during the closing procedure, it will open
again automatically. The automatic obstacle
recognition with reversing feature is only an
aid. It is not a substitute for your attentive-
ness when opening and closing the trunk lid.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
over the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey, or
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
R
press the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid
Opening/closing automatically from
outside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
92
Trunk
Opening and closing
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 406).
Opening
You can open the trunk lid automatically
using the SmartKey.
X
Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
Closing
You can close the trunk lid automatically
using the SmartKey or the closing button in
the trunk lid.
X
Press and release closing button : on the
trunk lid.
or
X
If the SmartKey is located in the immediate
vicinity of the vehicle: press the F but-
ton on the SmartKey.
You can release the button as soon as the
trunk lid starts to close.
X
To stop the closing process:
R
Press the F button on the SmartKey,
or
R
Press closing button : or locking but-
ton ; on the trunk lid, or
R
Press the remote operating switch on the
driver's door, or
R
In vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
kick into the sensor detection range
under the bumper with your foot.
i
If the F button on the SmartKey is
pressed or HANDS-FREE ACCESS is initi-
ated after the closing process is stopped,
the trunk lid opens.
Trunk
93
Opening and closing
Z
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing
feature and KEYLESS-GO: when all the
doors are closed, you can simultaneously
close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The
SmartKey must be located to the rear of the
vehicle.
X
Press and release locking button ; on the
trunk lid.
If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside
the vehicle, the trunk lid closes and the
vehicle locks.
i
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the
trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is
closed.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey
outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains
closed.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot.
You could burn yourself by touching the
exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE
ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always
ensure that you only make the kicking move-
ment within the detection range of sensors.
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following
situations, for example, could lead to the
unintentional opening of the trunk:
R
using a car wash
R
using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
General notes
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE
ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid
or stop the procedure without using your
hands. This is useful if you have your hands
full. To do this, make a kicking movement
under the bumper with your foot.
Observe the following points:
R
Carry your KEYLESS-GO key about your
person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in
the rear detection range of the vehicle.
R
When making the kicking movement, make
sure that you are standing firmly on the
ground and that there is sufficient clear-
ance to the rear of the vehicle. You could
otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
R
Always ensure that you only make the kick-
ing movement within the detection range of
sensors :.
R
Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
rear area while doing so.
R
Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. Oth-
erwise, the sensors may not function cor-
rectly.
R
HANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function
when the engine is started.
R
If a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear
detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HAND-
FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk
lid could thus be opened or closed unin-
tentionally, for example, if you:
-
sit on the edge of the trunk.
-
set something down or lift something up
behind the vehicle.
-
polish the rear of the vehicle.
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about
your person in these situations or in situa-
94
Trunk
Opening and closing
tions similar to these. This will prevent the
unintentional opening/closing of the trunk.
R
Dirt caused by road salt around sensors :
may restrict functionality.
R
Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a
prosthetic leg may restrict functionality.
Operation
X
To open/close: kick into sensor detection
range : under the bumper with your foot.
You will hear a warning tone while the trunk
lid is opening or closing.
X
If the trunk lid does not open after sev-
eral attempts: wait at least ten seconds
then move your leg under the bumper once
again.
i
If you hold your foot under the bumper for
too long, the trunk lid does not open or
close. Repeat the leg movement more
quickly if this occurs.
To stop the opening or closing procedure:
R
kick with your leg in the sensor detection
range : under the bumper or
R
press the closing button in the trunk lid or
R
press the F button on the SmartKey
If the trunk lid closing procedure has been
stopped:
R
move your foot under the bumper again and
the trunk lid will open.
If the trunk lid opening procedure has been
stopped:
R
move your foot under the bumper again and
the trunk lid will close.
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 406).
Trunk
95
Opening and closing
Z
Opening and closing
You can open and close the trunk lid from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary
and unlocked.
X
To open: pull remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
X
To close: press remote operating switch
for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is com-
pletely closed.
Locking the trunk separately
You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk
remains locked and cannot be opened.
Activating the function to lock the trunk sep-
arately:
X
Close the trunk lid.
X
Open the glove box.
X
Push the switch to position ;.
If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the
trunk remains locked.
i
You can also lock the glove box
(
Y page 301).
Deactivating the function to lock the trunk
separately:
X
Open the glove box.
X
Push the switch to position :.
If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the
trunk will also be unlocked.
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked:
R
using the SmartKey, or
R
using HANDS-FREE ACCESS, or
R
using the remote operating switch in the
door control panel:
Use the emergency release.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (
Y page 85).
X
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X
Pull handle : and fold down cover ;.
96
Trunk
Opening and closing
X
Slide the tip of the mechanical key into
opening = and turn.
The lock cover is levered off.
1
Basic position
2
To unlock
X
Insert the mechanical key into the lock as
far as the stop.
X
Turn the mechanical key from position 1
counter-clockwise as far as it will go to
position 2.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.
X
Turn the mechanical key back to position
1 and remove it.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key.
X
Close the lock cover.
X
Swing cover ; upwards until it engages.
X
Fold up the rear seat armrest.
Trunk emergency release
You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside
with the emergency release button.
X
Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk
lid emergency release when the vehicle is
stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not
unlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon-
nected or discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
R
emergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
R
emergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed
Side windows
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win-
dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
Side windows
97
Opening and closing
Z
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
G
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The front side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts one of the front side win-
dows from traveling upwards during the auto-
matic closing process, the side window opens
again automatically. During the manual clos-
ing process, the side window only opens
again automatically after the corresponding
switch is released. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing a side window.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
while resetting
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-
dows
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch for
the front-passenger side window on the front-
passenger door.
The switches on the driver's door take prec-
edence.
:
Front left
;
Front right
=
Rear right
?
Rear left
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To open fully: press the switch beyond the
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To close manually: pull and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To close the front side windows fully:
pull the corresponding switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To interrupt automatic operation:
press/pull the corresponding switch again.
i
You can continue to operate the side win-
dows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function
remains active for five minutes or until you
open a door.
98
Side windows
Opening and closing
i Before opening or closing the side win-
dows, a check is carried out to see whether
a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle, if:
R
a side window switch is pressed or pulled
and
R
the Start/Stop button is used instead of
the SmartKey in the ignition lock
and
R
the engine is not running
This is carried out by means of a brief radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey.
Convenience opening
General notes
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving.
If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the
vehicle, the convenience opening function is
available.
The "convenience opening" feature is also
available on unlocked vehicles.
To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out
the following functions simultaneously:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open the side windows
R
switch on the seat ventilation for the driv-
er's seat
Convenience opening
X
Keep the % button pressed until the
side windows are in the desired position.
X
To interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When using the convenience closing feature,
parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-
ing area when a side window is being closed.
There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
When you lock the vehicle, you can close the
windows at the same time.
You can then close the roller sunblinds.
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature
for:
R
the side window (Y page 98)
R
the roller sunblind (Y page 101)
Using the SmartKey
X
Press and hold the & button until the
side windows are fully closed.
X
Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X
Press and hold the & button again until
the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
close.
X
To interrupt convenience closing:
release the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. All
the doors must be closed.
Side windows
99
Opening and closing
Z
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows are fully
closed.
i
Make sure you only touch recessed sen-
sor surface :.
X
Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblind
of the panorama roof closes.
X
To interrupt convenience closing:
release recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle.
Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X
Close all the doors.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (
Y page 98).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
X
Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (
Y page 98).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
X
If the respective side window remains
closed after the button is released, then it
has been set correctly. If this is not the
case, repeat the steps above again.
100
Side windows
Opening and closing
Problems with the side windows
G
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
A side window cannot
be closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
Remove the objects.
X
Close the side window.
A side window cannot
be closed and you can-
not see the cause.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Panorama roof
Operating the roller sunblind for the
panorama roof
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
parts of the body could be trapped between
the roller sunblind and the frame. There is a
risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
during automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.
The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior
from sunlight.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
The roller sunblind is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If an object blocks or
restricts the roller sunblind during the closing
process, the roller sunblind automatically
Panorama roof
101
Opening and closing
Z
opens again a little. The automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and is not a substitute
for your attention when closing the roller sun-
blind.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature especially does not
react to soft, light and thin objects such as
small fingers. This means that the reversing
feature cannot prevent someone being trap-
ped in these situations. There is a risk of
injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
during automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing the roller sunblind
:
To open
;
To open
=
To close
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press the 3 switch in direction : or
pull it in direction ;.
The roller sunblind opens.
X
Pull the 3 switch in direction =.
The roller sunblind closes.
i
If you press or pull the 3 switch
beyond the point of resistance, automatic
operation is started in the corresponding
direction. You can stop automatic opera-
tion by pressing or pulling again.
Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL:
you can also start and cancel automatic oper-
ation using button :.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press button :.
R
If the roller sunblind is completely
closed, it is automatically opened fully.
R
If the roller sunblind is not completely
closed, it is automatically closed fully.
R
If the roller sunblind is in motion, auto-
matic operation is canceled.
Resetting the roller sunblind for the
panorama roof
Reset the roller sunblind if it does not operate
smoothly.
102
Panorama roof
Opening and closing
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow :
until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
X
Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second.
X
Make sure that the roller sunblind
(
Y page 101) can be opened fully again.
X
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
X
If the roller sunblind still does not operate
smoothly, please contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL
General notes
MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, the
transparency of which can be changed by
applying electrical voltage.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched
between darkened and transparent states.
i
MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automat-
ically after a short period when you turn the
SmartKey to position 0 or remove it.
Risk of electric shock
G
DANGER
MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high
voltage. If the headliner behind the panorama
roof is damaged or removed, electrical com-
ponents will be exposed. If you touch these
components, you could get an electric shock.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
R
Never remove the headliner behind the
panorama roof.
R
If the headliner is damaged, never touch the
electrical components behind it.
R
Always have work on the MAGIC SKY CON-
TROL carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The high-voltage components of MAGIC SKY
CONTROL are protected behind the head-
liner.
The MAGIC SKY CONTROL voltage trans-
former is stamped with a high-voltage sym-
bol, warning you about the high voltage. The
electric cables of the high-voltage section are
color orange.
Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the sta-
tus it was set to before the engine was
switched off.
X
To change the degree of transparency:
press button :.
i
At sub-zero temperatures, the change is
slower and uneven. The entire process may
take some time.
Panorama roof
103
Opening and closing
Z
104
Useful information ............................ 106
Correct driver's seat position .......... 106
Seats .................................................. 107
Steering wheel .................................. 114
Mirrors ............................................... 117
Memory function ............................... 120
105
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Correct driver's seat position
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
X
Observe the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (
Y page 107).
X
Check whether you have adjusted seat =
properly (
Y page 108).
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
R
you are as far away from the driver's air bag
as possible
R
you are sitting in a normal upright position
R
you can fasten the seat belt properly
R
you have moved the backrest to an almost
vertical position
R
you have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported
R
you can depress the pedals properly
X
Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
ted properly.
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by the
center of the head restraint.
X
Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (
Y page 114).
X
Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly (
Y page 114).
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
R
you can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
R
you can move your legs freely
R
you can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
X
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(
Y page 46).
X
Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (
Y page 48).
The seat belt should:
R
fit snugly across your body
R
be routed across the middle of your shoul-
der
R
be routed in your pelvic area across the hip
joints
106
Correct driver's seat position
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
ror and the exterior mirrors in such a way
that you have a good view of road and traf-
fic conditions (
Y page 118).
X
Store the seat, steering wheel and exterior
mirror settings using the memory function
(
Y page 121).
Seats
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is
no SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(
Y page 50) and "Children in the Vehicle"
(
Y page 62).
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
tem.
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
!
To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
R
keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
R
if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
Seats
107
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
R
clean the seat covers as recommended;
see "Interior care".
R
do not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
R
when the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating mate-
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when
moving the seats back. There is a risk that
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged.
Adjusting the seats
Adjusting the driver's seat electrically
:
Head restraint height
;
Head restraint height
=
Seat height
?
Seat cushion angle
A
Seat cushion length
B
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
C
Backrest angle
You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (
Y page 121).
i
If PRE-SAFE
®
is triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavora-
ble position (
Y page 61).
i
To ensure the largest possible range of
seat settings, certain seat adjustment func-
tions will automatically activate other seat
adjustment functions.
i
The head restraint height is adjusted
automatically when you adjust the seat
height or the seat fore-and-aft position.
Adjusting the front-passenger seat
from the driver’s seat
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(
Y page 50) and "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 62).
G
WARNING
The front-air bags for could also injure the
vehicle occupants in the front If the front
seats are positioned too close to the dash-
board or steering wheel. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always adjust the front seats so that they are
as far from the front air bags as possible. Also
observe the notes on the correct adjustment
of the seats.
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
108
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
!
Do not move the front-passenger seat
fully forwards if there are objects in the
parcel net in the front-passenger footwell.
The objects could otherwise be damaged.
Adjusting the front-passenger seat
The SmartKey must be in the ignition lock and
in position 1 or 2, in order for the front-
passenger seat to be selected (
Y page 151).
X
To select the front-passenger seat:
press button : repeatedly until the indi-
cator lamp in the button lights up.
When the indicator lamp in button : lights
up, for the front-passenger seat you can
adjust:
R
adjust the seat (Y page 108)
R
seat heating (Y page 111)
R
seat ventilation (Y page 113)
R
the memory function to call up or save set-
tings (
Y page 120).
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
General notes
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(
Y page 107).
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust
the height and angle of the head restraints to
the correct position.
Adjusting the front head restraints
Adjusting the head restraints manually
With this function you can adjust the distance
between the head restraint and the back of
the seat occupant's head.
Seats
109
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
X
To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards in the direction of the arrow until
it engages in the desired position.
X
To move backwards: press and hold
release button :.
X
Push the head restraint back.
X
Release the release button once the head
restraint is in the desired position.
X
Ensure that the head restraint has engaged
properly.
Adjusting the front head restraints elec-
trically
The height of the front head restraints can be
adjusted using the seat adjustment switch
(
Y page 108).
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Lowering electrically from the front
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Briefly press button :.
The head restraints lower.
Extending from the front electrically
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Briefly press button : again.
The head restraints extend upwards.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height mechanically (Coupe)
X
To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X
To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Folding the front seat backrests
forward/back
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the backrest is not engaged, it could fold
forwards during a braking maneuver or in the
event of an accident, for example. The seat
backrest will then push the vehicle occupant
against the seat belt. The seat belt can no
longer offer the intended level of protection
and could even cause injuries. There is an
increased risk of injury.
Before each journey, make sure that the back-
rest engages fully as described.
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
110
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(
Y page 50) and "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 62).
Folding the seat backrest forward
The seat moves forwards as soon as you fold
the backrest forwards.
This makes it easier for passengers to get into
and out of the rear compartment. The head
restraint is lowered in the process and the
seat moves forwards.
X
Pull seat release handle : forwards and
fold the backrest forwards as far as it will
go.
The seat automatically moves to the fore-
most position and the head restraint is low-
ered.
Folding the seat backrest back
X
Fold back the backrest horizontally until it
engages.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this
will be shown in the multifunction display in
the instrument cluster. A warning tone also
sounds.
The seat moves automatically to the last
position.
Adjusting the active multicontour
seat
The settings for the active multicontour seat
are only activated if:
R
the seat is occupied
R
the seat belt is fastened.
Vehicles installed with the Seat Comfort
package: you can adjust the active multicon-
tour seat for the driver and front passenger
with COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
The 4-way lumbar support can be adjusted
with COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
G
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
Seats
111
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
For vehicles equipped with the Warmth Com-
fort package: the armrest in the door and the
center console can also be heated when you
switch on the seat heating of one of the front
seats. This can be set with COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
The distribution of the heated surfaces on the
seat cushions and backrests in the front can
be set via COMAND (see the separate oper-
ating instructions).
Front seats
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Rear seats
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
112
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Problems with the seat heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off prema-
turely or cannot be
switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
sumers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can be
switched back on manually.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Front seats
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the blower setting you have selected.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired blower setting is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i
You can open the side windows using the
"Convenience opening" feature
(
Y page 99). The seat ventilation of the
driver's seat automatically switches to the
highest level.
i
When the vehicle is stationary, the fan
speed can be reduced automatically. This
reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.
Seats
113
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Problems with the seat ventilation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat ventilation has
switched off prema-
turely or cannot be
switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
sumers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation can
be switched back on.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in
the ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel
:
To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
;
To adjust the steering wheel height
i Further related subjects:
R
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
(
Y page 116)
R
Storing settings (Y page 121)
R
Operating the on-board computer
(
Y page 231).
114
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel heating
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,
the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch
off the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Steering wheel
115
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The steering wheel
heating has switched
off prematurely or can-
not be switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
sumers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you
and other vehicle occupants particularly
children could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the seat and
the steering wheel.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by
R
the steering wheel: move the steering
wheel adjustment lever.
R
the seat: press the switch for seat adjust-
ment.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Press one of the memory function position
switches. The adjustment process is stopped.
G
WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
ture, they can become trapped, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature using COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
Position of the steering wheel and the
driver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/
EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel tilts upwards and the driv-
er's seat moves backwards if you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1
R
with the SmartKey: open the driver's
door; the SmartKey must be in position 0 or
1 in the ignition lock (
Y page 151)
R
open the driver's door when the ignition is
switched off
i
The steering wheel only tilts upwards and
the driver's seat only moves backwards if
the driving position is stored after seat or
steering wheel adjustment.
The last position of the steering wheel or seat
is stored if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the setting is stored with the memory func-
tion (
Y page 121).
i
The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper stop.
116
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The driver's seat only moves backwards if it
is not already in the rearmost position.
Position of the steering wheel and the
driver's seat for driving
The steering wheel and the driver's seat are
moved to the previously set position if:
R
the driver's door is closed and you insert
the SmartKey into the ignition lock
R
you close the driver's door when the igni-
tion is switched on
R
you press the Start/Stop button once on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
i
The steering wheel and the driver's seat
only return to the last set position when the
driving position is stored after seat or steer-
ing wheel adjustment.
The last position of the steering wheel or seat
is stored if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the setting is stored with the memory func-
tion (
Y page 121).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is
opened or the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the
vehicle and rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
ture is activated in COMAND (see the sepa-
rate operating instructions).
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
X
Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :
forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Mirrors
117
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press button ; for the right-hand exterior
mirror or button = for the left-hand exte-
rior mirror.
The indicator lamp lights up in the button
that has been pressed.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button : as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X
Press adjustment button : up, down, or to
the left or right until you have adjusted the
exterior mirror to the correct position. You
should have a good overview of traffic con-
ditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exte-
rior mirrors are automatically heated if the
rear window defroster is switched on and the
outside temperature is low.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i
If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the
exterior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-
rors when locking" function in the on-board
computer.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Briefly press button :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
This function is only available in vehicles for
Canada.
When the Automatic
Mirror Folding func-
tion is activated in COMAND (see the sepa-
rate operating instructions):
118
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
R
the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
side.
R
the exterior mirrors fold out automatically
again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.
i
If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
This function is only available in vehicles for
Canada.
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X
Press and hold button : until you hear a
click and the mirror engages audibly into
position (
Y page 118).
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(
Y page 118).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
glare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
incident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror.
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-
ing is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
:
Memory button M
;
Adjustment button
=
Button for the front-passenger side exte-
rior mirror
?
Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-
tion.
Mirrors
119
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press button = for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X
Use adjustment button ; to adjust the
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i
If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving posi-
tion after approximately ten seconds.
Using the memory button
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M :.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press button = for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
X
Use adjustment button ; to adjust the
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
X
Press memory button M : and one of the
arrows on adjustment button ; within
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X
If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position set-
ting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side using button =.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
R
as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
R
about ten seconds after you have disen-
gaged reverse gear
R
if you press button ? for the exterior mir-
ror on the driver's side
Memory function
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
G
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
pants particularly children could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
diately release the memory function position
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
120
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The memory function can be used at any time,
e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the igni-
tion lock.
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up
to three different settings, e.g. for three dif-
ferent people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
R
seat, backrest, head restraint position and
contour of the backrest in the lumbar
region
R
active multicontour seat: side bolsters of
the backrest, shoulder of the backrest, con-
tour of the backrest, dynamic function level
R
seat heating: distribution of the heated sec-
tions of the seat cushion and backrest
R
driver's side: position of the exterior mir-
rors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
R
position of the head-up display
X
Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 108).
X
On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (
Y page 114) and the exterior mirrors
(
Y page 118).
X
Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
tings have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting
X
Press and hold the corresponding storage
position button 1, 2 or 3 until:
R
Seat
R
Steering wheel
R
Exterior mirrors
R
Head-up display
are in the stored position.
i
If you release the storage position button,
the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting
functions stop immediately. The multicon-
tour seat setting or the 4-way lumbar sup-
port is still carried out.
Memory function
121
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
122
Useful information ............................ 124
Exterior lighting ................................ 124
Interior lighting ................................. 129
Replacing bulbs ................................. 130
Windshield wipers ............................ 130
123
Lights and windshield wipers
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli-
gations.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
R
the light switch
R
the combination switch (Y page 126)
R
the on-board computer (Y page 247)
Light switch
Operation
1 W
Left-hand standing lamps
2 X
Right-hand standing lamps
3 T
Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã
Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor
5 L
Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to Ã.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/
standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position 0
Automatic headlamp mode
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.
124
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visi-
bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-
time running lamps function is required by law
in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in bright ambient light: if you
turn the light switch to T, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visi-
bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,
the daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(
Y page 248).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
à is the favored light switch setting. The
light setting is automatically selected accord-
ing to the brightness of the ambient light
(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-
ditions such as fog, snow or spray):
R
SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
R
With the engine running: if you have acti-
vated the "daytime running lamps" function
via the on-board computer, the daytime
running lamps or the parking lamps and the
low-beam headlamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
X
To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
Low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it
is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
headlamps switch on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to the
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog.
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Parking lamps
!
If the battery has been excessively dis-
charged, the parking lamps or standing
lamps are automatically switched off to
enable the next engine start. Always park
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps
for several hours. If possible,
switc
h on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-
ted.
X
To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position 0.
X
Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
Exterior lighting
125
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Combination switch
Turn signal
:
High-beam headlamps
;
Turn signal, right
=
High-beam flasher
?
Turn signal, left
X
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X
To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
High-beam headlamps
X
To switch on manually: turn the Smart-
Key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start
the engine.
X
Vehicles without Adaptive Highbeam
Assist: turn the light switch to L or
Ã.
X
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
turn the light switch to L.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
and the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X
To deactivate: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is
activated, it automatically controls activation
and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps
(
Y page 127).
High-beam flasher
X
To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the
engine.
X
Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
X
To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X
To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
126
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
R
an air bag is deployed or
R
the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
brake application.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illu-
mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only
be activated when the low-beam headlamps
are switched on.
Active:
R
if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
R
if you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
and turn the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after
no more than three minutes.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
General notes
With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can
automatically switch between low-beam, par-
tial high-beam and high-beam headlamps.
Partial high-beam is a form of illumination
whereby the high-beam is directed past other
road users. Other road users are kept out of
the high-beam. This prevents glare. When
there is a vehicle in front, for example, the
high-beam headlamps illuminate the areas to
its right and left, and the vehicle in front is
illuminated by the low-beam headlamps.
The system automatically adapts the low-
beam headlamp range depending on the dis-
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-
tivates the high-beam headlamps.
If the high-beam or partial high-beam are
causing too much reflection from traffic
signs, the lights are automatically dimmed
and glare for the driver caused by the reflec-
tions is thus avoided.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
Exterior lighting
127
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec-
ognize road users:
R
who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
R
who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R
whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus may not recognize road users who do
have lights, or may recognize them too late. In
this or similar situations, the automatic high-
beam headlamps will not be deactivated or
will be activated regardless. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic condi-
tions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only
an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the
vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visi-
bility and traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be restricted if there is:
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
R
dirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
PLUS on/off
:
High-beam headlamps
;
Turn signal, right
=
High-beam flasher
?
Turn signal, left
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
tion display lights up if it is dark and the
light sensor activates the low-beam head-
lamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other
road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 28 mph (45 km/h) and other road
users have been detected:
Partial high-beam is selected automati-
cally. The K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 25 mph (40 km/h):
The partial high-beam headlamps are
switched off automatically. If no other road
128
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
users are recognize, the high-beam head-
lamps are switched on.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or the roads are
adequately illuminated:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X
To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
tion display goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of
the headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
:
p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
;
| To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
=
c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
?
u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
A
p To switch the right-hand front read-
ing lamp on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color, brightness and display lighting ,for
the ambient lighting can be set using
COMAND (see the separate COMAND oper-
ating instructions).
The interior lighting control can be operated
using the front overhead control panel.
Automatic interior lighting control
:
p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
;
| Switches the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
=
c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off
?
u Switches the rear interior lighting
on/off
A
p Switches the right-hand front read-
ing lamp on/off
Interior lighting
129
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
X
To activate/deactivate: press the |
button.
When the automatic interior lighting con-
trol is activated, the button is flush with the
overhead control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches
on if you:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open a door
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the igni-
tion lock. This delayed switch-off can be
adjusted using COMAND (see the separate
COMAND operating instructions).
Manual interior lighting control
:
p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
;
| To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
=
c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
?
u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
A
p To switch the right-hand front read-
ing lamp on/off
X
To switch the front interior lighting on/
off: press the c button.
X
To switch the interior lighting on/off:
press the u button.
X
To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
X
To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard
warning lamp button.
or
X
Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
Replacing bulbs
The front and rear light clusters of your vehi-
cle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not
replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle
safety. You must therefore make sure that
these function correctly at all times. Have the
headlamp setting checked regularly.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the wind-
shield wipers.
!
If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
130
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
!
Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-
shield becomes dirty in dry weather condi-
tions, the windshield wipers may be activa-
ted inadvertently. This could then damage
the windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
1
$ Windshield wiper off
2
Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
3
Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4
° Continuous wipe, slow
5
¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B
í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind-
shield using washer fluid
X
Switch on the power supply with the Start/
Stop button or the SmartKey (
Y page 151).
X
Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
wiping frequency is set automatically accord-
ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Å
position, the rain sensor is more sensitive
than in the Ä position, causing the wind-
shield wipers to wipe more frequently.
The washer fluid is fed through the wiper
blades; when the screen is wiped with washer
fluid î, the water is emitted directly from
the blades.
If you push and hold the combination switch
beyond the point of resistance in the direction
of arrow B, the manual wash program is
activated. If you push and hold the combina-
tion switch briefly beyond the point of resist-
ance in the direction of arrow B, the auto-
matic wash program is activated.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traff
ic c
ondi-
tions.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
!
To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
!
Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force of
the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
!
Always position the windshield wiper
arms vertically before folding them away
from the windshield. By doing so, you will
avoid damage to the hood.
Windshield wipers
131
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Replacing the wiper blades
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-
tion
On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Set the windshield wiper to the ° posi-
tion.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to
the hood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in
the ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Remove the SmartKey.
X
Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
shield until you feel them snap into place.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X
Set the windshield wipers to position °.
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly
until the windshield wiper starts.
X
When the wiper arms have reached the ver-
tical position, press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until the windshield wipers stop.
X
Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
shield until you feel them snap into place.
Removing a wiper blade
X
To bring the wiper blade into position to
be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with
one hand. With the other hand, turn the
wiper blade in the direction of arrow :
beyond the point of resistance.
The wiper blade engages in the removal
position with an audible click.
X
To remove a wiper blade: firmly press
release knob ; and pull the wiper blade
upwards =.
Installing the wiper blades
X
Push the new wiper blade in the direction of
arrow : onto the wiper arm until tab ;
engages.
X
Push the wiper blade out of the removal
position in the direction of arrow = beyond
the point of resistance.
The wiper blade disengages with an audible
click and is freely movable again.
X
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
correctly.
X
Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.
132
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X
Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
Windshield wipers
133
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
134
Useful information ............................ 136
Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 136
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 138
Setting the air vents ......................... 146
135
Climate control
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Overview of climate control systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could other-
wise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
R
switch off climate control only briefly
R
switch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
R
switch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation function
R
switch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The air
filter cleans the air, thus improving the inte-
rior climate.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is only available when the engine is run-
ning. Optimum climate control is only ach-
ieved with the side windows and roof closed.
If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is
reactivated (
Y page 154).
The residual heat function can only be acti-
vated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (
Y page 143).
i
Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (
Y page 99). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
i
The integrated filter filters out most par-
ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-
ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-
lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces
the amount of air supplied to the vehicle
interior. For this reason, you should always
observe the interval for replacing the filter,
which is specified in the Maintenance
Booklet. As it depends on environmental
conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the
interval may be shorter than stated in the
Maintenance Booklet.
i
It is possible that the blower may be acti-
vated automatically 60 minutes after the
SmartKey has been removed depending on
various factors, e.g. the outside tempera-
ture. The vehicle is then ventilated for
30
minutes t
o dry the climate control sys-
tem.
136
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Automatic climate control panel
:
Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 139)
;
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 140)
=
Sets the airflow, left (Y page 141)
?
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 143)
A
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 141)
B
Calls up the COMAND climate control menu (see the separate operating instructions)
C
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 142)
D
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)
Switches the residual heat on or off (
Y page 143)
E
Sets the airflow, right (Y page 141)
F
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 140)
G
Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 139)
Notes on using automatic climate
control
Climate control system
Below, you can find a number of notes and
recommendations to help you use climate
control optimally.
R
Activate climate control using the Ã
rocker switch. The indicator lamp in the
à rocker switch lights up.
R
Set the temperature to 72 (22 †).
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
R
Use the residual heat function if you want to
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual
heat function can only be activated or deac-
tivated with the ignition switched off. The
residual heat function is switched off when
the ignition is switched on.
Overview of climate control systems
137
Climate control
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-
mate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (
Y page 157).
Operating the climate control sys-
tems
Activating/deactivating climate con-
trol
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. The windows could fog up.
Therefore, switch off climate control only
briefly
Switch on climate control primarily using the
à rocker switch (
Y page 139).
Activating or deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
To activate: press the t rocker switch
up or down.
The COMAND climate control menu opens.
X
Activate climate control via the air-condi-
tioning setting bar in COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
X
To deactivate: press the t rocker
switch up or down.
The COMAND climate control menu opens.
X
Deactivate climate control via the air-con-
ditioning setting bar in COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
Switching cooling with air dehumidi-
fication on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-
tion function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is only available when the engine is run-
ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
tion.
Activating or deactivating
X
To activate: press the Á rocker switch
up or down.
The indicator lamp above the rocker switch
lights up.
or
X
Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation" function via COMAND (see the sep-
arate operating instructions).
X
To deactivate: press the Á rocker
switch up or down.
The indicator lamp above the rocker switch
goes out.
or
X
Deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidi-
fication" function via COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
138
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in
the Á button
flashes three times or
remains off. Cooling
with air dehumidifica-
tion can also no longer
be switched on using
COMAND (see the sep-
arate operating instruc-
tions).
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
malfunction.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem-
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is activated. If necessary, cooling
with air dehumidification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-
tion function only briefly.
Setting climate control to automatic
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Set the desired temperature using the
w rocker switch.
or
X
Set the desired temperature using
COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
X
To activate: press rocker switch à up
or down.
The indicator lamp in the à rocker
switch lights up.
X
To switch to manual operation: press the
K rocker switch up or down.
or
X
Set the airflow using COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
or
X
Set the air distribution using COMAND (see
the separate operating instructions).
The indicator lamp in rocker switch Ã
goes out.
In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or
air distribution manually, the indicator lamp
on the à rocker switch goes out. The func-
tion which has not been changed manually,
however, continues to be controlled automat-
ically. When the manually set function
Operating the climate control systems
139
Climate control
switches back to automatic mode, the indi-
cator lamp on the à rocker switch lights
up again.
Adjusting the climate mode settings
In automatic mode you can select the follow-
ing airflow settings for the driver's and front-
passenger areas:
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and
draught-free setting
X
To set: set the climate mode using
COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
Setting the temperature
General notes
You can set the temperature separately for
the following areas:
R
front footwells, left and right
R
driver and front passenger area
Setting the temperature
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
To increase or reduce: press the w
rocker switch up or down.
or
X
Set the temperature using COMAND (see
the separate operating instructions).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 (22 †).
Setting the footwell temperature
The footwell temperature for the driver and
front passenger can be set separately using
COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
¯
Directs air through the defroster vents
P
Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O
Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S
Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
a
Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
W
Sets the air distribution to automatic
Setting the air distribution using
COMAND
The air distribution for the left and right sides
of the driver and front passenger area can be
adjusted using COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
140
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Setting the airflow
General notes
You can select different airflow settings for
the driver's and front-passenger sides.
Setting the airflow
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
To increase or reduce: press the K
rocker switch up or down.
or
X
Set the airflow using COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
Activating or deactivating the syn-
chronization function
Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronization function. The settings for
temperature, air distribution and airflow on
the driver's side are adopted for the front-
passenger side.
X
To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate the synchronization function using
COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
The synchronization function switches off, if
the settings for the front-passenger side are
changed.
Defrosting the windshield
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or
front side windows on the inside.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
To switch on: press the ¬ rocker
switch on the front control unit up or down.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ rocker
switch lights up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
R
high airflow
R
high temperature
R
air distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
R
air-recirculation mode off
R
windshield heating on
X
To deactivate: press the ¬ rocker
switch up or down.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ rocker
switch goes out. The previously selected
settings are restored. Air-recirculation
mode remains deactivated.
or
X
Press the à rocker switch up or down.
or
X
Use the t rocker switch to call up the
COMAND climate control menu.
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
X
Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation" function with the Á rocker
switch.
or
X
Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation" function via COMAND (see the sep-
arate operating instructions).
X
Switch on automatic mode using the Ã
rocker switch.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "Windshield defrosting" function using
the ¬ rocker switch. The windshield
heating is switched on.
i
You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Operating the climate control systems
141
Climate control
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Activate the windshield wipers.
X
Switch on automatic mode using the Ã
rocker switch.
i
If you clean the windows regularly, they
do not fog up so quickly.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow defroster may switch off.
Activating or deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ rocker
switch lights up or goes out.
142
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window
defroster has deactiva-
ted prematurely or can-
not be activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
X
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
You can also temporarily deactivate the flow
of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are
entering the vehicle from outside. The air
already inside the vehicle will then be recir-
culated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in particu-
lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-
lation mode briefly to prevent the windows
from fogging up.
Activating or deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
To activate: press the g rocker switch
up or down.
The indicator lamp in the g rocker
switch lights up.
Air-recirculation mode is automatically acti-
vated at high levels of pollution or at high out-
side temperatures. The indicator lamp in the
g rocker switch is not lit when automatic
air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside
air is added after about 30 minutes.
X
To deactivate: press the g rocker
switch up or down.
The indicator lamp in the g rocker
switch goes out.
Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-
cally:
R
after approximately five minutes at outside
temperatures below approximately 41
(5 †)
R
after approximately five minutes if cooling
with air dehumidification is deactivated
R
after approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 41
(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion" function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
Once the engine is switched off, it is possible
to make use of the residual heat of the engine
to continue heating or ventilating the front
compartment of the vehicle for approximately
30 minutes.
The heating or ventilation time depends on
the temperature that has been set.
Activating or deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
tion lock or remove it (
Y page 151).
X
To activate: press the Á rocker switch
up or down.
The indicator lamp in rocker switch Á
lights up.
The blower will run at a low speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
Operating the climate control systems
143
Climate control
If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
X
To deactivate: press the Á rocker
switch up or down.
The indicator lamp in the Á rocker
switch goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
R
after approximately 30 minutes
R
when the ignition is switched on
R
if the battery voltage drops
Perfume atomizer
Operating the perfume atomizer
G
WARNING
If children open the perfume vial, they could
drink the perfume or it could come into con-
tact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do
not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult
a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with
your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean
water. If you continue to experience difficul-
ties, consult a doctor.
H
Environmental note
Full perfume vials must not
be disposed of with house-
hold rubbish. They must be
collected separately and
recycled to protect the envi-
ronment.
Dispose of full perfume vials
in an environmentally
responsible manner and
take them to a special waste
collection point.
:
Perfume lid
;
Perfume vial
The perfume atomizer helps to improve driv-
ing comfort.
Using COMAND, you can:
R
switch the perfume atomizer on or off
R
regulate the perfume intensity (see the sep-
arate operating instructions)
The following conditions can affect your per-
ception of the perfume intensity:
R
operating mode of the climate control sys-
tem
R
interior temperature
R
time of year or day
R
air humidity
R
physiological condition of occupants, e.g.
fatigue or hunger
The perfume atomizer can only be operated
when the climate control system is switched
on and is only active when the glove box is
closed.
The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-
filled perfume vial. You can also choose from
a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty
vial which you can fill yourself.
If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the
separate information sheet attached to the
vial.
!
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz
interior perfumes, observe the manufactur-
ers' safety notices on the perfume packag-
ing.
144
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it
is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.
X
To insert the perfume vial: open the glove
box (
Y page 301).
X
Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far
as it will go.
X
To remove the perfume vial: pull out the
perfume vial.
X
To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid
of the empty perfume vial to refill it your-
self.
X
Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of
the desired liquid perfume.
X
Screw the lid back on to the vial.
!
Only refill the vial when you are outside
the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume
could drip into the interior and contaminate
it.
Always refill the empty refillable vial with the
same perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-
ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-
izer.
Operating the climate control systems
145
Climate control
Z
Problems with the perfume atomizer
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The vehicle interior is
not perfumed although
the perfume atomizer is
activated.
The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it
will go.
X
Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.
The perfume vial has not been adequately filled.
X
Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.
X
Use a new pre-filled vial.
X
Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the
same perfume.
The perfume atomizer is faulty.
X
Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Ionization
You can use the "Ionization" function to purify
the air in the vehicle interior and attain an
improved interior climate.
The ionization of the interior air is odorless
and cannot be perceived directly in the vehi-
cle interior.
You can switch ionization on or off using
COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
Ionization can only be switched on if the front
climate control system is activated. The side
air vent on the driver's side must be open.
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
R
keep the air inlet between the windshield
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves.
R
never cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
Setting the center air vents
:
Fixed center air vent
;
Center air vent, right
146
Setting the air vents
Climate control
=
Center vent control, right
?
Center vent control, left
A
Center air vent, left
X
To open/close: press control = or ?.
The control pops out.
X
Turn control = or ? counter-clockwise or
clockwise.
X
To adjust the air direction: hold rear air
vent ; or A by the middle fin and move up
or down or to the left or right.
Setting the side air vents
:
Side window defroster vent
;
Side air vent
=
Control for left side air vent
X
To open/close: press control =.
The control pops out.
X
Turn control = counter-clockwise or
clockwise.
X
To adjust the air direction: hold side air
vent ; by the middle fin and move it up or
down or to the left or right.
Setting the glove box air vent
!
Close the air vent when heating the vehi-
cle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
midification" function. Otherwise, temper-
ature-sensitive items stored in the glove
box could be damaged.
When the climate control system is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents. The level of airflow
depends on the airflow and air distribution
settings.
:
Air vent control
;
Air vent
X
To open or close: turn control : to the
right or left.
Setting the rear-compartment air
vents
X
To open/close: press control =.
The control pops out.
X
Turn control = counter-clockwise or
clockwise.
X
To adjust the air direction: hold rear air
vent : or ; by the middle fin and move up
or down or to the left or right.
Setting the air vents
147
Climate control
Z
148
Useful information ............................ 150
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
cle ....................................................... 150
Driving ............................................... 150
Automatic transmission ................... 159
Refueling ............................................ 167
Parking ............................................... 170
Driving tips ........................................ 174
Driving systems ................................ 179
149
Driving and parking
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driv-
ing safety systems adjusts automatically
while a certain distance is being driven after
the vehicle has been delivered or after
repairs. Full system effectiveness is not
reached until the end of this teach-in proce-
dure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future.
R
You should therefore drive at varying vehi-
cle and engine speeds for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
R
Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-
tle, during this period.
R
When shifting gears manually, upshift in
good time, before the tachometer needle
reaches Ô of the way to the red area of the
tachometer.
R
Do not manually shift to a lower gear to
brake the vehicle.
R
Try to avoid depressing the accelerator
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
down).
R
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km), drive in drive program E.
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-
AMG vehicles:
R
Do not drive faster than 85 mph
(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km).
R
Only allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
R
Change gear in good time.
R
Ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
drive in program C.
After 1000 miles(1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate
the vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on
breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed.
Driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
150
Driving
Driving and parking
G
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
R
shoes with thick soles
R
shoes with high heels
R
slippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
R
overheat and cause a fire
R
lose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
!
Do not warm up the engine with the vehi-
cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid
high engine speeds and driving at full throt-
tle until the engine has reached its operat-
ing temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the vehicle
is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. You could otherwise damage the
drive train.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine
oil temperatures below 68 (+20 †), the
maximum engine speed is restricted in
order to protect the engine. To protect the
engine and maintain smooth engine oper-
ation, avoid driving at full throttle when the
engine is cold.
SmartKey positions
SmartKey
g
To remove the SmartKey
1
Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2
Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3
To start the engine
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started.
Start/Stop button
General notes
All vehicles are equipped with a removable
Start/Stop button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into
the ignition lock, the system needs approx-
imately two seconds recognition time. You
can then use the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
Driving
151
Driving and parking
Z
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,
when starting the engine.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
R
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in
the ignition lock.
R
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
R
the vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (
Y page 83).
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
Key.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time:
R
you will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
R
you will not be able to start the engine with
the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-
ton on the front doo
r (Y page 89), you can
continue to start the engine with the Start/
Stop button.
The engine can be switched off while the vehi-
cle is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for three seconds. This
function operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine switch-off func-
tion.
Key positions with the Start/Stop button
:
Start/Stop button
;
Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Further information on situations where
an indicator lamp either fails to go out after
starting the engine or lights up while driving
(
Y page 287).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this corresponds to the key being
removed from the ignition.
X
To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can
now activate the windshield wipers, for
example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
R
the driver's door is opened and
R
you press Start/Stop button : twice when
in this position
X
To switch on the ignition: press Start/
Stop button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
The ignition is switched off again if:
R
you do not start the engine within
15 minutes when in this position
R
you press Start/Stop button : twice when
in this position.
The power supply is switched off again if:
R
the driver's door is opened and
R
you press Start/Stop button : twice when
in this position
152
Driving
Driving and parking
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-
mal using the SmartKey.
It is only possible to switch between Start/
Stop button mode and SmartKey operation
when the transmission is in position P.
X
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock when you leave
the vehicle. You should, however, always take
the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehi-
cle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
R
the vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
R
the electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
G
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
!
Do not depress the accelerator when
starting the engine.
General notes
During a cold start, the engine runs at higher
speeds to enable the catalytic converter to
reach its operating temperature. The sound of
the engine may change during this time.
Automatic transmission
X
Shift the transmission to position P
(
Y page 159).
The transmission position display in the
multifunction display shows
P (
Y page 161).
You can start the engine in transmission posi-
tion P and N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
To start the engine using the SmartKey
instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the
Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
tion lock and release it as soon as the
engine is running (
Y page 151).
Driving
153
Driving and parking
Z
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop
button
The Start/Stop button can be used to start
the vehicle manually without inserting the
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/
Stop button must be inserted in the ignition
lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
This mode for starting the engine operates
independently of the ECO start/stop auto-
matic engine start function.
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is
in the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with
you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only
leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the
important safety notes.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once
(
Y page 151).
The engine starts.
Starting procedure via smartphone
Observe the important safety notes on start-
ing the engine (
Y page 153).
You can also start your engine via your smart-
phone from outside the vehicle. In this case,
the previously selected climate control set-
ting is activated. In this way you can cool or
heat the interior of the vehicle before starting
the journey.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it
is safe to start and run the engine where your
vehicle is parked.
Observe the legal stipulations in the area
where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via
smartphone may be limited to certain coun-
tries or regions.
You can execute a maximum of two consec-
utive starting attempts via your smartphone.
Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at
any time.
You can only start the engine via your smart-
phone if:
R
the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button is
not inserted in the ignition lock
R
park position P is selected
R
the accelerator pedal is not depressed
R
the anti-theft alarm system is not activated
R
the panic alarm is deactivated
R
the hazard warning lamps are switched off
R
the hood is closed.
R
the doors are closed and locked
R
the windows and sliding sunroof are closed
Also make sure that:
R
the fuel tank is filled sufficiently
R
the starter battery is sufficiently charged
G
WARNING
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during ser-
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of
injury.
Always secure the engine against uninten-
tional starting before carrying out mainte-
nance or repair work.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone before carrying out
maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an
engine start via your smartphone, for exam-
ple, if you:
R
switch on the hazard warning lamps
R
do not lock the doors
R
open the hood
Pulling away
General notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
154
Driving
Driving and parking
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pull-
ing away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (
Y page 90).
It is only possible to shift the transmission
from position P to the desired position if you
depress the brake pedal. Only then is the
parking lock released.
If you do not depress the brake pedal, the
DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but
the parking lock remains engaged.
i
Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (
Y page 172).
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
G
WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
R
you are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
R
the transmission is in position N.
R
the electric parking brake is applied.
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-
ped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
of your vehicle.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
General notes
:
ECO start/stop display
Driving
155
Driving and parking
Z
The ECO start/stop function is activated
whenever you switch on the engine using the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automat-
ically by the ECO start/stop function, the
è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunc-
tion display.
The ECO start/stop function is only available
in drive program E (drive program C on
Mercedes-AMG vehicles).
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
R
the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
R
the outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
R
the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature.
R
the set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
R
the battery is sufficiently charged.
R
the system detects that the windshield is
not fogged up when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
R
the hood is closed.
R
the driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine is stopped automatically.
The HOLD function can be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It
is then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase.
When you depress the accelerator pedal, the
engine starts automatically and the braking
effect of the HOLD function is deactivated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): automatic engine switch-off can take
place a maximum of four times in a row (initial
stop, then three subsequent stops).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of
consecutive automatic engine switch-offs is
unlimited.
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically if:
R
you switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button
R
you switch to drive program S or M
R
in transmission position D or N the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is
not active
R
you depress the accelerator pedal
R
you engage reverse gear R
R
you move the transmission out of position
P
R
you unfasten your seat belt or open the
driver's door
R
the vehicle starts to roll
R
the brake system requires this
R
the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
R
the system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
R
the battery's condition of charge is too low
Shifting the transmission to position P does
not start the engine.
156
Driving
Driving and parking
Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
X
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will
then not be switched off automatically when
the vehicle stops.
If drive program S or M has been selected, the
ECO start/stop function is always deactiva-
ted.
If you switch on the ECO start/stop function
while drive program S is selected, the drive
program automatically switches to E.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To deactivate: in drive program C, press
ECO button :.
or
X
Switch to drive program S or M
(
Y page 163).
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If drive program S or M is active, the auto-
matic transmission switches to drive pro-
gram C.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will
then not be switched off automatically when
the vehicle stops.
If drive program S or M has been selected, the
ECO start/stop function is always deactiva-
ted.
If you switch on the ECO start/stop function
while drive program S is selected, the drive
program automatically switches to C.
Driving
157
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
R
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
R
There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X
Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster go out.
X
Try to start the engine again (Y page 153). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 351).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X
Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not run-
ning smoothly and is
misfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
X
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The coolant tempera-
ture gauge shows a
value above 248
(120 †).
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X
Check the coolant level (Y page 328). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
158
Driving
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
j
Park position with parking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to
its original position. The current transmission
position P, R, N or D appears in the transmis-
sion position display (
Y page 161) in the mul-
tifunction display.
Engaging park position P
!
If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-
cle is moving, do not shift the automatic
transmission directly from D to R, from R to
D or directly to P. The automatic transmis-
sion could otherwise be damaged.
j
Park position with parking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-
tion of arrow P.
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key and remove the SmartKey
R
you switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key or using the Start/Stop button and
open the driver's door or front-passenger
door
R
the driver's door is opened when the vehi-
cle is stationary or driving at very low speed
and the transmission is in position D or R
Under certain conditions, the automatic
transmission shifts automatically to transmis-
sion position P if the HOLD function or
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe the
information on the HOLD function
Automatic transmission
159
Driving and parking
Z
(Y page 193) and on DISTRONIC PLUS
(
Y page 186).
Engaging reverse gear R
!
Only shift the automatic transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
X
If the transmission is in position D or N:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever up past the first point of
resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not available
when reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-
mation on the ECO start/stop function
(
Y page 155).
Shifting to neutral N
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
X
If the transmission is in position D or R:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down to the first point of
resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the trans-
mission in position R or D, the automatic
transmission shifts to N automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the
driver's door or the front-passenger door or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to P automati-
cally.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then
open the driver's door or the front-passenger
door, the automatic transmission shifts to P
automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
a towing system:
Using the SmartKey:
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
With the Start/Stop button:
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
160
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
X
If the transmission is in position R or N:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever down past the first point of
resistance.
Transmission position display
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
:
Transmission position
;
Gear
=
Drive program
The arrows in the transmission position dis-
play show how and into which transmission
positions you can shift using the DIRECT
SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should
pull away carefully to check whether the
desired transmission position is engaged.
Ideally, you should select transmission posi-
tion D and drive program E or S.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
:
Transmission position
;
Drive program
The arrows in the transmission position dis-
play show how and into which transmission
positions you can shift using the DIRECT
SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should
pull away carefully to check whether the
desired transmission position is engaged.
Ideally, you should select transmission posi-
tion D and drive program C or S.
Automatic transmission
161
Driving and parking
Z
Transmission positions
B
Park position
Only shift the transmission into
position P when the vehicle is sta-
tionary (
Y page 170). The parking
lock should not be used as a brake
when parking. Always apply the
electronic parking brake in addi-
tion to the parking lock in order to
secure the vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are mal-
functioning, the transmission may
be locked in position P. Have the
vehicle electronics checked imme-
diately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
C
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into
position R when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
matic transmission could be dam-
aged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP
®
is deactivated or faulty:
shift the transmission to position N
if the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding, e.g. on icy roads.
!
Rolling in neutral N can damage
the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position D. This automatic gear shift-
ing behavior is determined by:
R
the selected drive program (Y page 163)
R
the position of the accelerator pedal
(
Y page 162)
R
the road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
R
little throttle: early upshifts
R
more throttle: late upshifts
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Rocking the vehicle free
Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and
forth between transmission positions D and R
can help to free a vehicle that has become
stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine
management restricts switching between
transmission positions D and R to speeds up
to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift
back and forth between transmission posi-
tions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever
up and down past the point of resistance.
162
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Program selector button
X
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles): press program selector but-
ton : to change the drive program.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press program
selector button : repeatedly until the let-
ter for the desired drive program appears in
the multifunction display.
The program selector button influences:
R
the drive program (Y page 164)
R
the engine management
On Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program E
is called drive program C.
The automatic transmission switches to auto-
matic drive program E (drive program C in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles).
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
E Economy Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
You can also activate manual drive program
M using the steering wheel paddle shifters
(
Y page 164). In manual drive program M,
you can briefly change gear yourself by using
the steering wheel paddle shifters.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
C Controlled
Efficiency
Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
Permanent drive program M is only available
for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
Further information about permanent drive
program M (
Y page 165).
You can also activate manual drive program
M using the steering wheel paddle shifters
(
Y page 164). In manual drive program M,
you can briefly change gear yourself by using
the steering wheel paddle shifters.
For further information on the automatic drive
program, see (
Y page 164).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
Automatic transmission
163
Driving and parking
Z
You can activate manual drive program M in
the E (C in AMG vehicles) and S automatic
drive programs using steering wheel paddle
shifters : and ; (
Y page 164). In manual
drive program M, you can briefly change gear
yourself by using the steering wheel paddle
shifters.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: you can also acti-
vate manual drive program M with the pro-
gram selector button (
Y page 165). In man-
ual drive program M, you can permanently
change gear yourself by using the steering
wheel paddle shifters.
Automatic drive program
Automatic drive program E
Drive program E (drive program C on
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterized by
the following:
R
comfort-oriented engine settings.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner.
R
the vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle has improved driving stability
on slippery road surfaces, for example.
R
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin.
Automatic drive program S
Drive program S is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
R
sporty engine settings.
R
the vehicle pulling away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifting up
later.
R
the fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
Manual drive program M
General notes
In this drive program, you can briefly change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel pad-
dle shifters. The transmission must be in posi-
tion D.
You can activate manual drive program M in
the E (C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) and S
automatic drive programs.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: as well as tempo-
rary drive program M, you can also activate
permanent drive program M. Further infor-
mation about permanent drive program M
(
Y page 165).
Activating
X
Shift the transmission to position D.
X
Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
shifter (
Y page 163).
Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-
vated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles:)Mand the selected gear appear
in the multifunction display.
Shifting gears
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission
switches to manual drive program M for a
limited amount of time. Depending on which
paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic trans-
mission immediately shifts into the next gear
down or up, if permitted.
X
To shift up: pull the right-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter (
Y page 163).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
If the maximum engine speed on the cur-
rently engaged gear is reached and you
164
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
continue to accelerate, the automatic
transmission automatically shifts up in
order to prevent engine damage.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
transmission will not shift up to the next
gear when the engine speed is very low.
X
To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer-
ing wheel paddle shifter (
Y page 163).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine
speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine dam-
age by not shifting down.
Automatic down shifting occurs when
coasting.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommended gear ; according
to gearshift recommendation : when
shown in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Deactivating
If you have activated manual drive program
M, it will remain active for a certain amount of
time. Under certain conditions the minimum
amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of
lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase
or when driving on steep terrain.
If manual drive program M has been deacti-
vated, the automatic transmission shifts into
the automatic drive program that was last
selected.
You can also deactivate manual drive pro-
gram M yourself:
X
Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-
dle shifter and hold it in place (
Y page 163).
or
X
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X
Use the program selector button to change
the drive program (
Y page 163).
Manual drive program M is deactivated.
The automatic transmission switches to
the previously activated drive program E
(drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) or S.
Manual drive program (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles)
General information
In this drive program, you can permanently
change gear yourself by using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
be in position D.
Manual drive program M is different from
drive program S with regard to spontaneity,
responsiveness and smoothness of gear
changes.
As well as this permanent drive program M,
you can also activate temporary drive pro-
gram M (
Y page 164).
Switching on the manual drive program
In manual drive program M, you can change
gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters
if the transmission is in position D. You can
see the currently selected drive program and
which gear is engaged in the multifunction
display.
Automatic transmission
165
Driving and parking
Z
X
Press the program selector button
(
Y page 163) repeatedly until M appears in
the multifunction display.
Upshifting
!
In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up automati-
cally even when the engine limiting speed
for the current gear is reached. When the
engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel
supply is cut to prevent the engine from
overrevving. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of
the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of
engine damage.
:
Gear indicator
;
Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
When message ; appears in the multi-
function display, pull on the right-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
Downshifting
X
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (
Y page 163).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear if this is permissible.
Maximum acceleration
X
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter until the transmission selects the
optimum gear according to the speed.
If you slow down or stop without shifting
down, the automatic transmission automati-
cally shifts down.
Switching off the manual drive program
X
Press the program selector button
(
Y page 163) repeatedly until C or S
appears in the multifunction display.
166
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no
longer changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Transfer case
!
Performance tests may only be carried
out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
system or transfer case could otherwise be
damaged. Contact a qualified specialist
workshop for a performance test.
!
To prevent ESP
®
from intervening, the
ignition must be switched off (SmartKey or
the Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if:
R
the electric parking brake is being tested
on a brake dynamometer.
R
the vehicle is being towed with only one
axle raised (not permitted for vehicles
with 4MATIC).
The brake system could otherwise be dam-
aged.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
Refueling
167
Driving and parking
Z
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G
WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
tank and fuel lines drained completely.
!
Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
!
Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
!
Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
system could be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(
Y page 401).
Refueling
General information
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(
Y page 167).
If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the out-
side, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the vehicle.
Opening the fuel filler flap
:
To open the fuel filler flap
;
To insert the fuel filler cap
=
Tire pressure table
?
Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-
eled
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition
lock:
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
168
Refueling
Driving and parking
X
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X
Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise
and remove it.
X
Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on
the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X
Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X
Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i
Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
If you drive at speeds above 2 km/hwith the
fuel filler flap open, the Fuel
filler flap
open message is shown in the multifunction
display.
i
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
i
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. A message appears in the multi-
function display (
Y page 271).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (
Y page 293).
For further information on warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(
Y page 293).
Refueling
169
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as
the SmartKey having been removed.
or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock:
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap can-
not be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X
Unlock the vehicle (Y page 83).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 85).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
170
Parking
Driving and parking
!
Always secure the vehicle correctly
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
R
the electric parking brake must be applied.
R
the transmission must be in position P and
the SmartKey must be removed from the
ignition lock.
R
the front wheels must be turned towards
the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi-
ents.
R
the empty vehicle must be secured at the
front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
R
a laden vehicle must also be secured at the
rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Further information if the engine cannot be
switched off as described here (
Y page 359).
Using the SmartKey
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
tion lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
If you switch the engine off with the trans-
mission in position R or D, the automatic
transmission shifts to N automatically.
If you then open the driver's door or the
front-passenger door or remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to P automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
a towing system:
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
Using the Start/Stop button
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 151)
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
When the driver's door is closed, this cor-
responds to key position 1. When the driv-
er's door is open, this corresponds to key
position 0: "Key removed".
If you switch the engine off with the trans-
mission in position R or D, the automatic
transmission shifts to N automatically.
If you then open the driver's or front-
passenger door, the automatic transmission
shifts to P automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
a towing system:
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
Parking
171
Driving and parking
Z
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in an emer-
gency while the vehicle is in motion by press-
ing and holding the Start/Stop button for
three seconds. This function operates inde-
pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
engine switch-off function.
Electric parking brake
General notes
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The function of the electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction
in the system, it may not be possible to apply
the released parking brake.
X
If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it roll-
ing away.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion P.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
The electric parking brake performs a func-
tion test at regular intervals while the engine
is switched off. The sounds that can be heard
while this i
s occurring are normal.
Applying or releasing manually
X
To engage: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The electric parking brake can also be
applied when the SmartKey is removed.
X
To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter goes out.
The electric parking brake can only be
released:
R
when the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (
Y page 151) or
R
if the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button
172
Parking
Driving and parking
Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically
applied when the transmission is in position P
and:
R
the engine is switched off or
R
the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To prevent the electric parking brake from
being automatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brake is also engaged
automatically if:
R
DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
standstill or
R
the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
stationary
R
Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary
In addition, at least one of the following con-
ditions must be fulfilled:
R
there is a system malfunction.
R
the power supply is insufficient.
R
the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up.
The electric parking brake is not automati-
cally engaged if the engine is switched off by
the ECO start/stop function.
Releasing automatically
The electric parking brake is released auto-
matically when all of the following conditions
are fulfilled:
R
the engine is running.
R
the transmission is in position D or R.
R
the seat belt has been fastened.
R
you depress the accelerator pedal.
If the automatic transmission is in position R,
the trunk lid must be closed.
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
release the electric parking brake:
R
the driver's door is closed.
R
you have shifted out of transmission posi-
tion P or you have previously driven faster
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Ensure that you do not depress the acceler-
ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the
parking brake will be released and the vehicle
will start to move.
Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an
emergency by using the electric parking
brake.
X
While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake (
Y page 172).
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
handle : of the electric parking brake
pressed. The longer electric parking brake
handle : is depressed, the greater the
braking force.
During braking:
R
a warning tone sounds
R
the Please Release Parking Brake
message appears
R
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
Parking
173
Driving and parking
Z
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
i
You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving tips
General driving tips
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the coun-
try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile
phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
second.
Drive sensibly save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
X
The tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure.
X
Remove unnecessary loads.
X
Remove roof racks when they are not nee-
ded.
X
Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X
Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
X
Have all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
interval display.
Fuel consumption also increases when driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in
hilly terrain.
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs.
Emission control
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
174
Driving tips
Driving and parking
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
reason, all work on the engine must be carried
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-
Benz technicians.
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
specific service work must be carried out at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display provides feedback on how
economical your driving characteristics are.
The ECO display assists you in achieving the
most economical driving style for the selec-
ted settings and prevailing conditions. Your
driving style can significantly influence the
vehicle's consumption.
The ECO display consists of three bars:
R
Accel.
R
Constant
R
Coasting
The percent value is the average value of the
three bars. The three bars and the mean value
begin at the value of 50%. A higher percent-
age indicates a more economical driving
style.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count
in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed
consumption.
Apart from driving style, consumption is
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
R
load
R
tire pressure
R
cold start
R
choice of route
R
electrical consumers switched on
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
play.
The evaluation of your driving style is carried
out using the following three categories:
R
Accel. (evaluation of all acceleration pro-
cesses)
-
The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
-
The bar empties: sporty acceleration
R
Constant (assessment of driving behavior
at all times)
-
The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
and deceleration
-
The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
R
Coasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes)
-
The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early release
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
without use of the brakes.
-
The bar empties: frequent braking
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
To achieve a higher value in the categories
Accel.
and Constant,
R
observe the gearshift recommendations.
R
drive in drive program E.
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on
the highway, only the bar for Constant
will
change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving char-
acteristics from the start of the journey to its
completion. For this reason, the bars change
dynamically at the beginning of the journey.
On longer journeys, there are fewer changes.
Driving tips
175
Driving and parking
Z
For more dynamic changes, carry out a man-
ual reset.
For further information on the ECO display,
see (
Y page 236).
Braking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
!
On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
advantage of the engine braking effect and
helps avoid overheating and excessive
wear of the brakes.
When you take advantage of the engine
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-
face. This could cause damage to the drive
train. This type of damage is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Heavy and light loads
G
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
!
Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-
tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up
the brake discs, thereby drying them more
quickly and protecting them against corro-
sion.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
residue may form on the brake discs and
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
longer braking distance.
R
In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply
the brakes occasionally while paying atten-
tion to the traffic conditions.
R
Carefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
R
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
!
If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and you hear a warn-
ing tone while the engine is running, the
brake fluid level may be too low. Observe
176
Driving tips
Driving and parking
additional warning messages in the multi-
function display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immedi-
ately. This work should be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-
formance tests may only be carried out on
a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to oper-
ate the vehicle on such a dynamometer,
please consult an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center in advance. You could other-
wise damage the drive train or the brake
system.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP
®
system
operates automatically. The engine and the
ignition must therefore be switched off (the
SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the
ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must
be in position 0 or 1) if the electric parking
brake is tested on a brake dynamometer.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP
®
may cause severe damage to the brake
system.
!
Vehicles without 4MATIC: the ESP
®
system operates automatically. The engine
and the ignition must therefore be switched
off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1
in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button
must be in position 0 or 1) if:
R
the electric parking brake is tested using
a brake dyn
amometer.
R
the vehicle is towed with one axle raised.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP
®
may cause severe damage to the brake
system.
All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop to arrange this.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the function-
ality of your brakes at regular intervals.
Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (
Y page 68)
and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)
(
Y page 69).
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends only installing the following brake
disks and brake pads/linings:
R
brake disks that have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz
R
brake pads/linings that have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz or that are of
an equivalent standard of quality
Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can
compromise the safety of your vehicle.
Always replace all brake disks and brake
pads/linings on an axle at the same time.
Always install new brake pads/linings when
replacing brake disks.
The vehicle is equipped with lightweight
brake disks to which the wheel assembly with
rim and threaded connection is matched.
The use of brake disks other than th
ose
appr
oved by Mercedes-Benz can change the
track width and is subject to approval, if appli-
cable.
Shock-type loads when handling the brake
disks, such as when changing wheels, can
lead to a reduction in comfort when driving
with lightweight brake disks. Avoid shock-
type loads on the lightweight brake disks,
particularly on the brake plate.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use brake fluid that has been specially
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
or which corresponds to an equivalent quality
standard. Brake fluid which has not been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
which is not of an equivalent quality could
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Driving tips
177
Driving and parking
Z
AMG high-performance and ceramic
brakes
The high-performance brake system is only
available on Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
The AMG brake systems are designed for
heavy loads. This may lead to noise when
braking. This will depend on:
R
Speed
R
Braking force
R
Environmental conditions, such as temper-
ature and humidity
The wear of individual components of the
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
or brake discs, depends on the individual driv-
ing style and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a
mileage that will be valid under all circum-
stances. An aggressive driving style will lead
to high wear. You can obtain further informa-
tion about this from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt
your driving and braking accordingly during
this break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in corre-
spondingly high brake wear. Observe the
brake wear warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and note any brake status messages
in the multifunction display. Especially for
high performance driving, it is important to
maintain and
have the b
rake system checked
regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
R
you drive at low speeds.
R
the tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
R
lower your speed.
R
avoid ruts.
R
avoid sudden steering movements.
R
brake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads
!
Do not drive through flooded areas.
Check the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
This can damage the electronic compo-
nents in the engine or the automatic trans-
mission. Water can also be drawn in by the
engine's air suction nozzles and this can
cause engine damage.
Winter driving
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
G
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
178
Driving tips
Driving and parking
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-
fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-
ter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position N.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
ing point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (
Y page 365).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (
Y page 364).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (
Y page 364).
Driving systems
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for
innovative driver assistance and safety sys-
tems which enhance comfort and support the
driver in critical situations. With these intelli-
gent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz
has set a milestone on the path towards
autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one
well thought out system for the safety of the
vehicle occupants and that of other road
users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(
Y page 67).
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into
a lower gear in good time on long and steep
downhill gradients. This is especially impor-
tant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
will make use of the braking effect of the
engine. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from over-
heating and wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road,
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane.
Driving systems
179
Driving and parking
Z
Do not use cruise control:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
To activate or increase speed
;
To activate or reduce speed
=
To deactivate cruise control
?
To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display
for five seconds. In the speedometer, the seg-
ments between the stored speed and the
maximum speed light up.
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
or down ;.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i
Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
Calling up the last speed stored
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There
is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
180
Driving systems
Driving and parking
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
i
Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
erate to overtake, cruise control adjusts
the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
X
Briefly press cruise the control lever for-
wards : .
or
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
R
you engage the electric parking brake
R
you are driving at less than 20 mph
(30 km/h)
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
you shift the transmission to position N
while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
trol Off message in the multifunction dis-
play for approximately five seconds.
i
When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Driving systems
181
Driving and parking
Z
DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the dis-
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-
cles are detected with the aid of the radar
sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes
automatically so that the set speed is not
exceeded.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is espe-
cially important if the vehicle is laden. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-
vent a collision without your intervention. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound and
the distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
in front or take evasive action provided it is
safe to do so.
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while dri
ving o
n
roads with steep gradients.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it
can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
i
USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any u
nauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles
R
oncoming and crossing traffic
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
warnings nor intervene in such situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
uations.
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
neither give a warning nor intervene
R
accelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
182
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
G
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
to 50%of the maximum possible deceleration.
If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
a risk of an accident.
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
try to take evasive action.
!
If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
cally in certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-
vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-
tion in the following or other similar situa-
tions:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
of accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions.
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is snow or heavy rain
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for
example, in parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-
cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-
edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored
speed.
This speed may:
R
be too high if you are driving in a filter lane
or an exit lane
R
be so high in the right lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive
countries)
R
be so high in the left lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the right (right-hand
drive countries)
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
To activate or increase speed
;
To activate or reduce speed
=
To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
?
To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
A
To set the specified minimum distance
Driving systems
183
Driving and parking
Z
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
Activation conditions
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine must be started. It may take up
to two minutes after pulling away before
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
R
the electric parking brake must be
released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, but not intervening.
R
Active Parking Assist must not be activa-
ted.
R
the transmission must be in position D.
R
the driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
R
the front-passenger door and rear doors
must be closed.
Activating
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ;, up : or down = .
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : to the
pressure point for a higher speed, or down
= for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored
is increased or reduced.
or
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past
the pressure point for a higher speed, or
down = for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored
is increased or reduced.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
i
If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the DISTRONIC
PLUS Passive mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle
in front will then not be maintained. You will
be driving at the speed you determine by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is
20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
184
Driving systems
Driving and parking
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Pulling away and driving
X
If you want to pull away with
DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from
the brake pedal.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
or
X
Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no
vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle
accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is
facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on
a different line from another vehicle. The vehi-
cle then brakes automatically. Be ready to
brake at all times.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.
In this way, the distance you have selected is
maintained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to
the speed you have stored.
Selecting the drive program
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles):
DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving
style when you select the S drive program
(
Y page 163). Acceleration behind the vehicle
in front or to the set speed is then noticeably
more dynamic. If you have selected the E
driving program, the vehicle accelerates
more gently. This setting is recommended in
stop-and-start traffic.
AMG vehicles: DISTRONIC Plus supports a
sporty driving style when you select the S or
M drive program (
Y page 163). Acceleration
behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed
is then noticeably more dynamic. When you
select the C drive program, the vehicle accel-
erates more gently. This setting is recom-
mended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
R
you are driving faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h)
R
you switch on the appropriate turn signal
R
DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision
Driving systems
185
Driving and parking
Z
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front becomes too small.
i
When you change lanes, DISTRONIC
PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand-
drive vehicles or the right lane on right-
hand-drive vehicles.
Stopping
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
R
there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
R
DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
R
the battery is disconnected.
R
the accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
For further information on deactivating
DISTRONIC PLUS (
Y page 188).
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it
is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
Depending on the specified minimum dis-
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at
a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
front. The specified minimum distance is set
using the control on the cruise control lever.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to posi-
tion P if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
a system malfunction occurs.
R
the power supply is not sufficient.
If a malfunction in the electric parking brake
occurs, then the transmission may also be
shifted into position P automatically.
Setting a speed
X
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
186
Driving systems
Driving and parking
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
i
If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished over-
taking.
Setting the specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
tion, you can set the minimum distance that
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(
Y page 187).
i
Make sure that you maintain the mini-
mum distance to the vehicle in front as
required by law. Adjust the distance to the
vehicle in front if necessary.
X
To increase: turn control ; in direction
=.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
X
To decrease: turn control ; in direc-
tion :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-
ment cluster
Displays in the speedometer
When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, trian-
gle ; shows the stored speed.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments between the speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed ; light up. The
segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front
is detected in the fast lane.
i
For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-
vated
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
?
Own vehicle
Driving systems
187
Driving and parking
Z
In the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of the
on-board computer, you can select the assis-
tance graphics display.
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(
Y page 243).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-
ted
:
DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only
appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated)
;
Vehicle in front, if detected
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
?
Own vehicle
In the Assistance menu (
Y page 244) of the
on-board computer, you can select the assis-
tance graphics display.
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(
Y page 243).
You will see the stored speed for about five
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
There are several ways to deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC
PLUS Off message in
the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i
The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i
DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
ted if:
R
you engage the electric parking brake or if
the vehicle is automatically secured with
the electric parking brake
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
the transmission is in the P, R or N position
R
you pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
R
the vehicle has skidded
R
you activate Active Parking Assist
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off
message in the multi-
188
Driving systems
Driving and parking
function display for approximately five sec-
onds.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
R
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
R
Vehicles traveling on a different line
R
Other vehicles changing lanes
R
Narrow vehicles
R
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
R
Crossing vehicles
In such situations, brake if necessary.
DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-
cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-
cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Driving systems
189
Driving and parking
Z
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect
vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-
ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with
crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle
in the center of the driving lane by means of
moderate steering interventions at speeds of
0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
means of camera system : at the top of the
windshield.
At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),
Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,
taking into account lane markings, e.g. when
following vehicles in a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)
Steering Assist focuses on detected lane
markings (left and right), and only on the vehi-
cle in front if lane markings are missing.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-
vide any support if these conditions do not
exist.
DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for
the function to be available.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
It cannot take account of road, weather and
traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
190
Driving systems
Driving and parking
braking in good time and for staying in your
lane.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traf-
fic conditions. If you are following a vehicle
which is driving towards the edge of the road,
your vehicle could come into contact with the
curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly
aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that
are directly next to your vehicle.
Obstacles such as building site huts on the
lane or projecting out into the lane are not
detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.
after intentionally driving over a lane marking,
can be corrected at any time if you steer
slightly in the opposite direction.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your
vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering
intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi-
cle back to the lane. In such cases, you must
steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it
does not leave the lane.
The support provided by the system can be
impaired if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
R
there are no, several or unclear lane mark-
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-
struction work
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are strong shadows cast on the road
The system is switched t
o passive and no lon-
ger assists you by performing steering inter-
ventions if:
R
you actively change lane
R
you switch on the turn signal
R
take your hands off the steering wheel or do
not steer for a prolonged period of time
i
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
activated again automatically after a lane
change is completed.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-
vide any support:
R
on very sharp corners
R
when a loss of tire pressure or a defective
tire has been detected and displayed
Pay attention also to the important safety
notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (
Y page 182).
The steering interventions are carried out
with a limited steering moment. The system
requires the driver to keep his hands on the
steering wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
period of time, the system will first alert you
with a visual warning. A steering wheel sym-
bol appears in the multifunction display. If you
have still not started to steer and have not
taken hold of the steering wheel after five
seconds at the latest, a warning tone also
sounds to remind you to take control of the
vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS
remains active.
Driving systems
191
Driving and parking
Z
Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot
X
Press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+:
Steering Assist. On message appears
in the multifunction display. Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot are activated.
Information in the multifunction display
If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-
vated but not ready for a steering interven-
tion, steering wheel symbol : appears in
gray. If the system provides you with support
by means of steering interventions, sym-
bol : is shown in green.
Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot
X
Press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+:
Steering Assist. Off message appears
in the multifunction display. Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not
available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
are deactivated automatically.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
R
when pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
R
when maneuvering on steep slopes
R
when waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
R
there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
R
the HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
R
the battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
192
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Further information on deactivating the HOLD
function (
Y page 193).
!
If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
cally in certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-
vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-
tion in the following or other similar situa-
tions:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if all of
the following conditions are fulfilled:
R
the vehicle is stationary.
R
the engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
R
the driver's door is closed or your seat belt
is fastened.
R
the electric parking brake is released.
R
the transmission is in position D, R or N.
R
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
Activating the HOLD function
X
Make sure that the activation conditions
are met.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
i
If depressing the brake pedal the first
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
cally if:
R
you accelerate and the transmission is in
position D or R.
R
you shift the transmission to position P.
R
you depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until ë dis-
appears from the multifunction display.
R
you secure the vehicle using the electric
parking brake.
R
you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
i
After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake. The HOLD function is then deacti-
vated.
When the HOLD function is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to posi-
tion P if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activa-
ted when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
a system malfunction occurs.
R
the power supply is not sufficient.
Driving systems
193
Driving and parking
Z
If a malfunction in the electric parking brake
occurs, then the transmission may also be
shifted into position P automatically.
MAGIC BODY CONTROL
General notes
MAGIC BODY CONTROL consists of Active
Body Control (ABC), ROAD SURFACE SCAN,
the CURVE cornering function as well as auto-
matic vehicle stabilization in the event of a
crosswind.
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to reduce fuel consumption. The sus-
pension mode is adjusted according to your
selection (SPORT, COMFORT or CURVE), the
road surface conditions and the vehicle load.
A multifunction camera detects bumps in the
road surface before the vehicle drives over
them. This reduces chassis movements.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
!
The vehicle is lowered when the engine is
switched off. When parking, position your
vehicle so that it does not make contact
with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your
vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
Crosswind Assist
The crosswind stabilization operates by
changing wheel loads through distortion of
the ABC spring struts. It reduces impairments
in handling when driving in a straight line and
assists during countersteering.
Crosswind Assist is active in the speed range
between 50 mph (80 km/h) and
130 mph (210 km/h) when driving straight
ahead or cornering gently.
Active Body Control ABC
Vehicle level
All vehicles except AMG vehicles: depend-
ing on the vehicle level that has been set, the
vehicle automatically adjusts its height
dependent on the current speed. The vehicle
is lowered by up to 0.6 in (15 mm) as the
speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the
vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height.
In the event of poor road surface conditions,
the vehicle automatically raises by up to 0.4 in
(10 mm) and harder damping is selected.
AMG vehicles: depending on the vehicle
level that has been selected, the vehicle auto-
matically adjusts its height dependent on the
current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to
0.4 in (10 mm) below the normal level as the
speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the
vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height.
Select the "Normal" setting for normal road
conditions and "Raised" for driving with snow
chains or in particularly poor road conditions.
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:
R
are driving faster than approximately
75 mph (120 km/h).
R
drive for approximately three minutes at a
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h).
194
Driving systems
Driving and parking
While driving, the raised level can only be
selected at speeds of under
75 mph (120 km/h).
Setting the raised vehicle level
X
Start the engine.
X
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press but-
ton :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle
height is adjusted to raised level.
Setting the normal vehicle level
X
Start the engine.
X
If indicator lamp ; is lit: press but-
ton :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to normal level.
Suspension tuning
The electro-hydraulically controlled ABC sus-
pension system works continuously. This
improves driving safety and comfort. The sys-
tem detects the vehicle level and the vehicle
load and adjusts the setting accordingly. You
can also choose between a particularly sporty
mode (SPORT), a comfortable mode (COM-
FORT), as well as a comfortable mode with
cornering function (CURVE).
The ABC suspension system is tuned individ-
ually to each wheel and depends on:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R
your individual selection, i.e. sporty or com-
fort or comfort with the CURVE dynamic
cornering function
R
the vehicle load
R
the force of the side wind
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
The firmer suspension setting in SPORT mode
ensures even better contact with the road.
The steering response behavior is sporty.
Select this mode on winding country roads or
highways, for example.
Selecting the sports suspension tuning
X
When indicator lamp ; is off: press but-
ton : repeatedly until only indicator
lamp ; is on.
You have selected the suspension for a
sporty driving style.
All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the
Active Body Control SPORT
message
appears in the multifunction display.
AMG vehicles: the AMG
Suspension Sys‐
tem SPORT message appears in the multi-
function display.
In COMFORT mode, the driving characteris-
tics of your vehicle are especially comforta-
Driving systems
195
Driving and parking
Z
ble. The steering response behavior is bal-
anced. Select this mode if you favor a com-
fortable driving style.
Selecting the standard comfort mode sus-
pension tuning
X
When indicator lamp ; is off: press but-
ton : repeatedly until only indicator
lamp ; is on.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selec-
ted the suspension for a comfortable driv-
ing style.
All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the
Active
Body Control COMFORT message
appears in the multifunction display.
AMG vehicles: the AMG
Suspension Sys‐
tem COMFORT message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
In the CURVE driving mode, the vehicle tilts
actively when cornering. The tilt function and
the comfort suspension tuning increase driv-
ing comfort in corners. CURVE is available in
the speed range between 18 mph (30 km/h)
and 100 mph (160 km/h). Select this mode
on winding roads in particular. Outside of this
speed range, the CURVE driving mode corre-
sponds to the comfort mode.
Selecting CURVE driving mode
X
Press button : repeatedly until both indi-
cator lamps ; and = light up.
CURVE driving mode is selected.
All vehicles except AMG vehicles:
CURVE driving mode is selected. The
Active Body Control CURVE
message
appears in the multifunction display.
AMG vehicles: the AMG Ride Control
CURVE message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
ROAD SURFACE SCAN
i
This function is not available in all coun-
tries.
If you have selected the CURVE driving
mode, the ROAD SURFACE SCAN function
is available up to speeds of 60 km/h.
The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors
the road in front of the vehicle using multi-
function camera : at the top of the wind-
shield. This function is automatically active if
you select comfort suspension tuning. The
system is operational at speeds of up to
81 mph (130 km/h).
This function allows bumps in the road sur-
face to be detected before the vehicle drives
over them. The spring struts are then actu-
ated, with the result that chassis movements
are significantly reduced when driving over
bumps.
The system is deactivated when you select
the raised vehicle level, sports mode or the
dynamic cornering function.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
R
the road surface is insufficiently lit
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. snow, rain, fog or
spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from the sun or from
oncoming traffic
196
Driving systems
Driving and parking
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov-
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
of the camera
R
the road surface has no texture or is reflec-
tive, e.g. in the case of newly laid asphalt,
concrete slabs or puddles
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short
R
sections of the route have a very small
radius of curvature
R
you accelerate hard or brake sharply
AIRMATIC
General notes
AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable
damping for improved driving comfort. All-
round level control ensures the best possible
suspension and constant ground clearance,
even with a laden vehicle. When you drive
fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to
improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con-
sumption. There is also the option to manually
adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of
level setting, level control and the Adaptive
Damping System ADS PLUS.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Vehicle level
Setting the raised vehicle level
It is possible to choose between the "Normal"
and "Raised" vehicle levels. Select the "Nor-
mal" setting for normal road surfaces and
"Raised" for driving with snow chains or on
particularly poor road surfaces. Your selec-
tion remains stored even if you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is
raised by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to the
normal level.
The Vehicle Rising
message appears in
the multifunction display.
i
The message disappears after ten sec-
onds, irrespective of the level reached. If
necessary, the vehicle is raised further.
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:
R
drive at a speed over approximately 75 mph
(120 km/h)
R
drive for approximately three minutes at a
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h)
Setting the normal vehicle level
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to normal level.
Driving systems
197
Driving and parking
Z
Suspension tuning
General notes
The Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS
automatically controls the calibration of the
dampers.
The damping is tuned individually to each
wheel and depends on:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R
your individual selection, i.e. sports or com-
fort
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
i
You can choose between the sporty and
comfortable mode. One of the two modes is
always active.
Sports tuning
The firmer suspension tuning in sport mode
ensures the best possible contact with the
road. Select this mode when employing a
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
roads.
All vehicles except AMG vehicles:
X
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press but-
ton :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports suspen-
sion tuning is selected.
The AIRMATIC SPORT
message appears in
the multifunction display.
AMG vehicles:
X
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press but-
ton :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If the driving
speed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h),
the vehicle is automatically lowered by
another 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the
normal level in sport mode.
The AMG
Suspension System SPORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort tuning
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. There-
fore, select this mode if you favor a more
comfortable driving style. Select comfort
mode also when driving fast on straight roads,
e.g. on straight stretches of highway.
X
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press but-
ton :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Comfort tuning
is selected.
All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the
AIRMATIC COMFORT
message appears in
the multifunction display.
AMG vehicles: the AMG
Suspension Sys‐
tem COMFORT message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
Load compensation
The vehicle can compensate differences in
the vehicle level by raising or lowering the
axles.
198
Driving systems
Driving and parking
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-
manently driven. Together with ESP
®
, it
improves the traction of your vehicle when-
ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient
grip.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
take account of road, weather and traffic con-
ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
R
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
R
Accelerate less when driving.
!
Never tow the vehicle with one axle
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
wheels must remain either on the ground or
be fully raised. Observe the instructions for
towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
contact with the ground.
i
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
ment for your attention to your immediate
surroundings. You are always responsible for
safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-
ing space. When maneuvering, parking or
pulling out of a parking space, make sure that
there are no persons, animals or objects in
the area in which you are maneuvering.
!
When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
R
switch on the ignition
R
shift the transmission to position D, R or N
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
Range of the sensors
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
sideration that are:
R
below the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
mals or objects.
R
above the detection range, e.g. overhang-
ing loads, truck overhangs or loading
ramps.
Driving systems
199
Driving and parking
Z
:
Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
side (example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them
(
Y page 335).
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the
relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
the minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.
Warning displays
:
Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
;
Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
=
Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is in the
instrument cluster. The warning display for
the rear area is located on the headliner in the
rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if opera-
tional readiness indicator = lights up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
200
Driving systems
Driving and parking
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission
position
Warning display
D
Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle
is rolling back-
wards
Rear and front areas
activated
P
No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
R
sixth segment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for approx-
imately two seconds.
R
seventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two sec-
onds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
:
Indicator lamp
;
To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : is on then PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
deactivated.
i
PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
Driving systems
201
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments
in the PARKTRONIC
warning displays are lit.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the
indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
X
If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Only the red segments
in the PARKTRONIC
warning displays are lit.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated.
The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
X
Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 335).
X
Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
X
See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol
indicates a suitable parking space. Active
steering intervention and brake application
can assist you during parking and when exit-
ing a parking space. You may also use
PARKTRONIC (
Y page 199).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. Make sure that
no persons, animals or objects are in the
maneuvering range.
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active
Parking Assist is also unavailable.
G
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
result in a collision with another road user.
There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
ing Assist parking procedure.
!
If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a
sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
parking spaces which are not suitable for
parking, for example:
R
where parking or stopping is prohibited
R
in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R
on unsuitable surfaces
202
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Parking tips:
R
On narrow roads, drive as close to the park-
ing space as possible.
R
Parking spaces that are littered or over-
grown might be identified or measured
incorrectly.
R
Parking spaces that are partially occupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
as such or be measured incorrectly.
R
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
R
Pay attention to the PARKTRONIC
(
Y page 200) warning messages during the
parking procedure.
R
You can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking
Assist will then be canceled.
R
When transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
R
Never use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
R
Make sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the vehi-
cle.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
R
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R
that are on straight roads, not bends
R
that are on the same level as the road, e.g.
not on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles.
G
WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range:
R
Active Park Assist may steer too early
R
the vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate Active Parking
Assist.
For further information on the detection
range (
Y page 199).
Active Parking Assist does not assist you
parking in spaces at right angles to the direc-
tion of travel if:
R
two parking spaces are located directly
next to one another
R
the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb
R
you park forwards
Active Parking Assist does not assist you
parking in spaces that are parallel or at right
angles to the direction of travel if:
R
the parking space is on a curb
R
the system reads the parking space as
being blocked, for example by foliage or
grass paving blocks
R
the area is too small for the vehicle to
maneuver into
R
the parking space is bordered by an obsta-
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
Driving systems
203
Driving and parking
Z
:
Detected parking space on the left
;
Parking symbol
=
Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is switched on automat-
ically when driving forwards. The system is
operational at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
system independently locates and measures
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
R
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel
and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel
and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your
vehicle
R
that are at right angles to the direction of
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider
than your vehicle
i
Note that Active Parking Assist cannot
measure the size of a parking space if it is at
right angles to the direction of travel. You
will need to judge whether your vehicle will
fit into the parking space.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as
a status indicator in the instrument cluster.
When a parking
space h
as been detected, an
arrow towards the right or the left also
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist
only displays parking spaces on the front-
passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-
er's side are displayed as soon as the turn
signal on the driver's side is activated. When
parking on the driver's side, this must remain
switched on until you acknowledge the use of
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The system automatically determines
whether the parking space is parallel or at
right angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are approx-
imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking
G
WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
away if:
R
there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
R
the battery is disconnected.
R
the accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
against rolling away.
i
When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
during the parking process. You are respon-
sible for braking in good time.
X
Stop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
X
Shift the transmission to position R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
204
Driving systems
Driving and parking
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X
To park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at
all times. When backing up, drive at a speed
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-
celed.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to
a standstill when the vehicle approaches
the rear border of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight park-
ing spaces.
The Park Assist Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Shift the transmission to position D while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
i
You will achieve the best results by wait-
ing for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away.
X
Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to
a standstill.
The Park Assist Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is com-
plete, the Park Assist Finished
message
appears in the multifunction display and a
warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now
parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without
the driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled when you
depress the accelerator pedal.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions and brake appli-
cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin-
ished, you must steer and brake again your-
self. PARKTRONIC is still available.
Parking tips:
R
The way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent
on various factors. These include the posi-
tion and shape of the vehicles parked in
front and behind it and the conditions of the
location. It may be the case that Active
Parking Assist guides you too far into a
parking space, or not far enough into it. In
some cases, it may also lead you across or
onto the curb. If necessary, you should can-
cel the parking procedure with Active Park-
ing Assist.
R
You can also select preselect transmission
position D. The vehicle redirects and does
not drive as far into the parking space.
Should the transmission change take place
too early, the parking procedure will be
canceled. A sensible parking posi
tion ca
n
no longer be achieved from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can sup-
port you when you exit the parking space:
R
the border of the parking space must be
high enough at the front and the rear. A
curb is too small, for example.
R
the border of the parking space must not be
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting
position as it is maneuvering into the park-
ing space.
R
a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
Driving systems
205
Driving and parking
Z
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
exiting a parking space if you have parked the
vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
Active Parking Assist.
i
If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active
Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst
the vehicle exits the parking space. You are
responsible for braking in good time.
X
Start the engine.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch on the turn signal in the direction
you are pulling away.
X
Shift the transmission to position D or R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play %.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X
To exit a parking space using Active
Parking Assist: press the a button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exit-
ing a parking space. Otherwise Active Park-
ing Assist will be canceled.
X
Shift the transmission to position D or R as
required or according to the message while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Park Assist
Active Accelerate and Brake
Observe Surroundings message appears
in the multifunction display.
i
You will achieve the best results by wait-
ing for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
X
Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several
times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and
the Park Assist Finished
message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
then have to steer and merge into traffic on
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You
can take over the steering, before the vehicle
has exited the parking space completely. This
is useful, for example when you recognize
that it is already possible to pull out of the
parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
X
Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Park Assist Canceled
mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
or
X
Press the PARKTRONIC button
(
Y page 201).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled
message
appears in the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-
cally if:
R
the electric parking brake is engaged
R
transmission position P is selected
R
parking using Active Parking Assist is no
longer possible
R
you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
R
a wheel spins, ESP
®
intervenes or fails. The
÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
disappears and the multifunction display
206
Driving systems
Driving and parking
shows the Park Assist Canceled mes-
sage.
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
must steer and brake again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.
Rear view camera
General notes
Rear view camera : is under a flap in the
trunk lid.
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND
display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
i
The text of messages shown in the
COMAND display depends on the language
setting. The following are examples of rear
view camera messages in the COMAND
display.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your imme-
diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the area
in which you are maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
R
if the trunk lid is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the camera is exposed to very bright light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when driving
into a heated garage in winter, causing a
rapid change in temperature
R
if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
R
if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the
rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the vehi-
cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
The guide lines in the COMAND display show
the distances to your vehicle. The distances
only apply to road level.
i
The rear view camera is protected from
raindrops and dust by means of a flap.
When the rear view camera is activated,
this flap opens.
The flap closes again when:
R
you have finished the maneuvering proc-
ess
R
you switch off the engine
R
you open the trunk
Observe the notes on cleaning
(
Y page 336).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.
Driving systems
207
Driving and parking
Z
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
X
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Make sure that the Activation by R
gear function is selected in COMAND (see
separate operating instructions).
X
Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera flap opens. The area
behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND display with guide lines.
The image from the rear view camera is
available throughout the maneuvering
process.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to P or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Displays in the COMAND display
The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
R
very close to the rear bumper
R
under the rear bumper
R
in the area immediately above the badge in
the trunk lid
!
Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of a parked vehicle
R
the drawbar of a trailer
R
the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bot-
tom-most guideline.
:
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
;
White guide line without turning the steer-
ing wheel, vehicle width including the
exterior mirrors (static)
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?
Yellow lane marking tires at current steer-
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
A
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Bumper
D
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the trans-
mission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
208
Driving systems
Driving and parking
:
Front warning display
;
Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
operational readiness indicator
=
Rear warning display
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if
PARKTRONIC is operational (
Y page 200), an
additional operational readiness indicator will
appear in COMAND display ;. If the
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the
COMAND display.
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
:
White guide line without turning the steer-
ing wheel, vehicle width including the
exterior mirrors (static)
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
=
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
?
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on .
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X
Using white guide line : as a guide, care-
fully back up until you reach the end posi-
tion.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost paral-
lel in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with the
steering wheel at an angle
:
Parking space marking
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on .
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the park-
Driving systems
209
Driving and parking
Z
ing space until yellow guide line ; reaches
parking space marking :.
X
Keep the steering wheel in that position
and back up carefully.
:
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possi-
ble.
:
White guide line at current steering wheel
angle
;
Parking space marking
X
Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-
tion while the vehicle is stationary.
:
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
;
White guide line without turning the steer-
ing wheel
=
End of parking space
X
Back up carefully until you have reached
the final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
the parking space.
180° view
:
Symbol for the 180° view function
;
PARKTRONIC warning displays
You can also use the rear view camera to
select a 180° view.
When PARKTRONIC is operational
(
Y page 200), a symbol for your own vehicle
appears in the COMAND display. If the
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active,
warning displays ; light up in the COMAND
display in yellow or red respectively.
210
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Object detection
The rear view camera can detect moving and
stationary objects. If, for example, a pedes-
trian or another vehicle is detected, these
objects are marked with bars. The system is
only able to detect and mark stationary
objects when your vehicle is moving. When
the vehicle is stationary, moving objects can
be detected and marked.
In order to use the function, it must be
switched on in COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
360° camera (surround view)
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of
four cameras.
The system analyzes images from the follow-
ing cameras:
R
Rear view camera
R
Front camera
R
Two side cameras in the exterior mirrors
The cameras capture the immediate sur-
roundings of the vehicle. The 360° camera
assists you, for instance when parking or at
exits with reduced visibility.
The 360° camera images can be shown in full
screen mode or in six different split-screen
views on the COMAND display. A split-screen
view also includes a top view of the vehicle.
This view is calculated from the data supplied
by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The six split-screen views are:
R
top view and picture from the rear view
camera (130° viewing angle)
R
top view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
R
top view and enlarged rear view
R
top view and enlarged front view
R
top view and images from the rear-facing
side cameras (rear wheel view)
R
top view and images from the forward-
facing side cameras (front wheel view)
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from D or R to N, the guide lines
in the COMAND display are hidden.
When you change between transmission
positions D and R, you see the previously
selected front or rear view.
Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will
also be optically displayed:
R
in split screen view as red or yellow brack-
ets around the vehicle icon in the top view,
or
R
at the bottom right as red or yellow brack-
ets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen
mode
The line thickness and color of the brackets
show how far the vehicle is from an object.
R
yellow brackets with thin lines:
PARKTRONIC is active
R
yellow brackets with normal lines: an
object is present in close range of the vehi-
cle
R
red line: an object is present in the imme-
diate close range of the vehicle
Important safety notes
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show
a distorted view of obstacles, show them
incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is
not a substitute for attentive driving.
You are always responsible for safe maneu-
vering and parking. When maneuvering or
parking, make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
You are always responsible for safety, and
must always pay attention to your surround-
ings when parking and maneuvering. This
applies to the areas behind, in front of and
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise
endanger yourself and others.
Driving systems
211
Driving and parking
Z
The 360° camera will not function or will
function in a limited manner:
R
if the doors are open
R
if the exterior mirrors are folded in
R
if the trunk lid is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the cameras are exposed to very bright
light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driv-
ing into a heated garage in winter, causing
a rapid change in temperature
R
if the camera lenses are dirty or covered.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(
Y page 336)
R
if the vehicle components in which the
cameras are installed are damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage
to objects or the vehicle.
The guide lines in the COMAND display show
the distances to your vehicle. The distances
only apply to road level.
i
The camera in the rear area is protected
from raindrops and dust by means of a flap.
This flap opens when the 360° camera is
activated.
The flap closes again when:
R
you have finished the maneuvering proc-
ess
R
you switch off the engine
R
you open the trunk
Observe the notes on cleaning
(
Y page 336).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the 360° camera has
been deactivated.
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
depending on technical conditions, leaving
the standard height can result in:
R
inaccuracies in the guide lines
R
inaccuracies in the display of generated
images (top view)
Activation conditions
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
R
COMAND is switched on (see the separate
operating instructions)
R
the 360° Camera function is switched on
i
If the 360° camera is activated at speeds
above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), a
warning message appears.
The warning message disappears if:
R
the vehicle's speed falls below approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h). The 360°
camera is then activated.
R
the message is confirmed with the %
button.
Switching the 360° camera on and off
using the button
X
To switch on: press button :.
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
R
full screen display with the image from
the front camera
R
full screen display with the image from
the rear view camera
X
To switch off: press button : again.
212
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Activating the 360° camera with
COMAND
X
Press the Ø button in the center con-
sole.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select the 360° camera: turn and press
the controller.
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
R
a split screen with top view and the
image from the front camera or
R
a split screen with top view and the
image from the rear view camera
Further information on the COMAND control-
ler can be found in the separate operating
instructions.
Activating the 360° camera using
reverse gear
The 360° camera images can be automati-
cally displayed by engaging reverse gear.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
X
Make sure that the Activation by R
gear function is selected in COMAND (see
separate operating instructions).
X
To show the 360° camera image: engage
reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND display in split-screen mode. You
see the top view of the vehicle and the
image from the rear view camera.
Selecting the split-screen and full
screen displays
Switching between split screen views:
X
To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide ZVthe controller.
X
To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.
Switching to full screen mode:
X
180° View Turn and press the controller.
i The 180° option is only available in the
following views:
R
Top view with picture from the rear view
camera
R
Top view with picture from the front cam-
era
Displays in the COMAND display
Important safety notes
The camera system may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the
system in the following locations:
R
under the front and rear bumpers
R
very close to the front and rear bumpers
R
in close range above the handle on the
trunk lid
R
very close to the exterior mirrors
R
in the transitional areas between the vari-
ous cameras in the virtual top view
!
Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of a parked vehicle
R
the drawbar of a trailer
R
the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bot-
tom-most guideline.
Driving systems
213
Driving and parking
Z
Top view with picture from the rear view
camera
:
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
;
Symbol for the split screen setting with
top view and rear view camera image
=
Guide line for the maximum steering angle
?
Yellow lane marking tires at current steer-
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
A
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
D
Bumper
E
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the trans-
mission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the front cam-
era
:
Symbol for the split screen setting with
top view and front camera image
;
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?
Yellow lane marking tires at current steer-
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
A
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the
vehicle
B
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
214
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Top view and enlarged rear view
:
Symbol for the split screen setting with
top view and rear view camera image
enlarged
;
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the dis-
tance to the vehicle behind you.
i
This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the side cam-
eras
:
Symbol for the top view and forward-
facing side camera setting
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side of
vehicle)
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)
i
You can also select the side camera set-
ting for the rear-facing view.
180° view
:
Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
view camera image
;
Own vehicle
=
PARKTRONIC warning displays
i
180° view can also be selected as front
view.
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-
ted, for example.
Exiting 360° camera display mode
The 360° camera display is stopped
R
when you select transmission position P, or
R
when you are driving at moderate speeds
The view which was active before the 360°
camera was displayed appears in the
COMAND display. You can also stop the 360°
camera display split-screen view by selecting
the % symbol in the display and then con-
firming with the COMAND controller.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to
125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTEN-
TION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fati-
gue or increasing lapses in concentration on
the part of the driver, it suggests taking a
break.
Driving systems
215
Driving and parking
Z
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
R
if the length of the journey is less than
approximately 30 minutes
R
if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
face is uneven or if there are potholes
R
if there is a strong side wind
R
if you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
R
if you are predominantly driving slower
than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than
125 mph (200 km/h)
R
if you are driving with the active Steer
Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS
R
if the time has been set incorrectly
R
in active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assess-
ment is deleted and restarted when continu-
ing the journey, if:
R
you switch off the engine
R
you take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break
Displaying the attention level
You can have current status information dis-
played in the assistance menu (
Y page 244)
of the on-board computer.
X
Select the Assistance display for ATTEN-
TION ASSIST using the on-board computer
(
Y page 243).
The following information is displayed:
R
length of the journey since the last break.
R
the attention level determined by ATTEN-
TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in
five levels from high to low.
R
if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a
warning, the System Passive
message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (
Y page 246).
The system determines the attention level
of the driver depending on the setting
selected:
Standard selected: the sensitivity with
which the system determines the attention
level is set to normal.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set
higher. The attention level detected by Atten-
tion Assist is adapted accordingly and the
driver is warned earlier.
216
Driving systems
Driving and parking
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction
display in the assistance graphic display.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva-
ted, it is automatically reactivated after the
engine has been stopped. The sensitivity
selected corresponds to the last selection
activated (standard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-
tion are detected, a warning appears in the
multifunction display: Attention Assist:
Take a Break!
In addition to the message shown in the mul-
tifunction display, you will then hear a warn-
ing tone.
X
If necessary, take a break.
X
Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST
continues to detect increasing lapses in con-
centration, you will be warned again after
15 minutes at the earliest. This will only hap-
pen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration.
If a warning is output in the multifunction dis-
play, COMAND performs a service station
search. You can select a service station and
navigation to this service station will then
begin. This function can be activated and
deactivated in COMAND.
Traffic Sign Assist
General notes
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum
speed permitted to the driver in the instru-
ment cluster. The data and general traffic reg-
ulations stored in the navigation system are
used to determine the current speed limit.
As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,
traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near
roadworks) are not detected.
If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle
is passed, the display of the speed limits is
updated.
Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are
also shown.
The traffic signs are only displayed with the
restrictions if:
R
the regulation must be observed with the
restriction, or
R
Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the
available sources, no speed limit is displayed
in the instrument cluster either.
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the
assistance graphic display (
Y page 243).
Important safety notes
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not
always able to correctly display speed limits.
Traffic signs always have priority over the
Traffic Sign Assist display.
The system may be either functionally
impaired or temporarily unavailable if the
information in the digital street map of the
navigation system is incorrect or out of date.
Driving systems
217
Driving and parking
Z
Activating Traffic Sign Assist
X
Activate the Traffic Sign Assist display
using the on-board computer
(
Y page 245).
If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist
display in the on-board computer, the traffic
regulations (speed limits and overtaking
restrictions) are displayed in the instrument
cluster for five seconds respectively. The
wrong-way warning and the traffic sign dis-
play for speed limits and overtaking restric-
tions remain active even when the display has
been deactivated.
Instrument cluster display
Displaying the assistance graphic
X
Call up the assistance graphics display
function using the on-board computer
(
Y page 243).
X
Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Speed limit with unknown restriction
:
Maximum permitted speed
;
Maximum permitted speed for vehicles
for which the restriction in the additional
sign is relevant
=
Additional sign for unknown restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 km/h
(60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply.
Speed limits in wet conditions
:
Maximum permitted speed
;
Additional signs for wet conditions
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) applies in wet conditions and if
Traffic Sign Assist has determined that the
restriction must be observed.
Canceling the speed limit
The speed limit no longer applies :.
i
The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)
depends on the country in which you are
driving. It is generally neither shown on the
traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster
but must be taken into account when
observing the maximum permitted speed.
218
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Night View Assist Plus
General notes
In addition to the illumination provided by the
normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus
uses infrared light to illuminate the road.
Night View Assist Plus camera ; picks up the
infrared light and displays a monochrome
image in the multifunction display. The image
shown in the display corresponds to a road lit
up by high-beam headlamps. This enables you
to see the road's course and any obstacles in
good time. When pedestrian recognition is
active, pedestrians recognized by the system
are visually highlighted in color in the Night
View Assist Plus display with small frame cor-
ners.
In addition, an infrared camera is integrated
into the radiator trim :. The camera helps
detect pedestrians and animals. Observe the
notes on cleaning the infrared camera
(
Y page 337).
i
Infrared light is not visible to the human
eye and therefore does not glare. Night
View Assist Plus can therefore remain
switched on even if there is oncoming traf-
fic.
Important safety notes
Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not
a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely
on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. Drive carefully and always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road
and traffic conditions.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
R
if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray
R
if the windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov-
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
of the camera
R
if the thermal imaging camera in the radia-
tor grill is dirty, fogged up or covered
R
on bends, hilltops or downhill gradients
R
at high outside temperatures
Night View Assist Plus cannot display objects
directly in front of or beside the vehicle.
It may be the case that other objects are
marked or highlighted as well as pedestrians
and animals.
Pedestrian and animal recognition
General notes
Pedestrian or animal recognition may be
impaired or inoperative if:
R
pedestrians or animals are partially or
entirely obscured by other objects, e.g.
parked vehicles
R
the silhouette of the pedestrian or of the
animal in the Night View Assist Plus display
is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by pow-
erful light reflections
R
pedestrians or animals do not contrast with
the surroundings
R
the camera system no longer recognizes
pedestrians as persons due to special
clothing or other objects
R
pedestrians are not in an upright position,
e.g. sitting, squatting or lying
R
animals are not recognized by the system,
e.g. because of their size or shape
Pedestrian and animal recognition is deacti-
vated at temperatures above 90 (32 †).
The spotlight function and automatic delayed
switch-off are then no longer active.
Driving systems
219
Driving and parking
Z
Pedestrian recognition
:
Night View Assist Plus display
;
Readiness symbol for active pedestrian
recognition
=
Highlighting
?
Pedestrian recognized
Night View Assist Plus can recognize pedes-
trians using typical characteristics, e.g. the
body contours and posture of a person stand-
ing upright.
Pedestrian recognition is then switched on
automatically if:
R
Night View Assist Plus is activated.
R
you are driving faster than approximately
6 mph (10 km/h).
R
it is dark.
If pedestrian recognition is active, readiness
symbol ; appears. Persons who are detec-
ted are highlighted by framing =. If the
pedestrian recognition system has brought a
pedestrian to your attention, look through the
windshield to evaluate the situation. The
actual distance to objects and pedestrians
cannot be gaged accurately by looking at a
screen.
Animal recognition
Animals can be recognized in the following
situations:
R
darkness
R
outside built-up areas
R
below an outside temperature of 90
(32 †)
Night View Assist Plus can recognize larger
animals such as deer, cows or horses using
typical characteristics.
The system does not detect:
R
smaller animals, e.g. dogs and cats
R
animals whose silhouette is not clearly rec-
ognizable
When detected, animals are marked with
small color frame corners. In contrast to
pedestrian recognition, there is no separate
readiness symbol in the multifunction dis-
play.
Activating/deactivating Night View
Assist Plus
Activation conditions
You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if
all of the following conditions are met:
R
the ignition is switched on (Y page 151) or
the engine has been started.
R
the light switch is in the à or L posi-
tion.
R
reverse gear has not been engaged.
Activating Night View Assist Plus
X
Press button :.
The Night View Assist Plus display appears
in the multifunction display.
i
The infrared headlamps only switch on in
the dark from speeds of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you do
not have the full visual range while the vehi-
cle is stationary and cannot check whether
220
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Night View Assist Plus is working. The infra-
red headlamps are deactivated at speeds
below 3 mph (5 km/h). The Night View
image continues to be displayed until you
deactivate it by pressing button :.
Automatic activation
You can select the Night View Assist
Automatic Activation option via the Night
View Assist menu. The pedestrian and animal
search function remains active even when the
Night View image is not displayed. In the dark,
in unlit surroundings and at speeds of more
than 60 km/h, the Night View image is auto-
matically displayed in the multifunction dis-
play as soon as pedestrians or animals are
detected.
X
In the assistance menu, select automatic
delayed switch-off of Night View Assist Plus
(
Y page 244).
Deactivating Night View Assist Plus
X
Press button :.
The Night View Assist Plus display disap-
pears from the multifunction display. Night
View Assist is deactivated.
Spotlight function
General notes
Under certain conditions, the spotlight func-
tion uses the headlamps to flash at detected
pedestrians.
The spotlight function is only active if:
R
pedestrian recognition is active
R
the road surface is not lit
R
the driving speed is at least 40 mph
(60 km/h)
R
the "Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS" func-
tion is activated (
Y page 128)
The spotlight function is not active or is active
only to a limited extent if:
R
you are driving in city traffic
R
there are pedestrians located in the area of
an oncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front
Activating the spotlight function
The pedestrian detection with spotlight func-
tion is running the background. If the prereq-
uisites are met, the spotlight function uses
the headlamps to flash four short pulses at a
pedestrian detected on or near to the road
surface.
X
In the light menu, select the spotlight func-
tion of Night View Assist (
Y page 247).
The spotlight function does not flash at ani-
mals.
Display in the assistance graphic
Pedestrian symbol : in the assistance
graphic indicates the status of the spotlight
function. If the symbol is displayed not filled
in, the function is switched on. If the symbol is
displayed filled in, the conditions for the spot-
light function are met.
Displaying the assistance graphic
X
Select the Assistance Graphic menu on
the on-board computer (
Y page 243).
Driving systems
221
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with Night View Assist Plus
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The picture quality of
Night View Assist Plus
has deteriorated.
The windshield is fogged up on the inside.
X
Fold down camera cover (Y page 337).
X
Defrost the windshield (Y page 141).
The windshield is iced up.
X
De-ice the windshield (Y page 141).
The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.
X
Replace the wiper blades (Y page 131).
The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a
car wash.
X
Clean the windshield (Y page 335).
There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.
X
Replace the windshield.
The pedestrian and ani-
mal recognition is not
available.
The infrared camera in the radiator grill is dirty.
X
Use a soft cloth and water to clean the infrared camera.
Driving Assistance PLUS package
General notes
The Driving Assistance PLUS package con-
sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (
Y page 182), Active
Blind Spot Assist (
Y page 222) and Active
Lane Keeping Assist (
Y page 225).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
system, pointed toward the rear of the vehi-
cle, to monitor the area to the sides of the
vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A
warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
responding turn signal to change lanes, you
will also receive a visual and audible collision
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-
ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a
collision. Before a course-correcting brake
application, Active Blind Spot Assist evalu-
ates the space in the direction of travel and at
the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind
Spot Assist uses radar sensors which are
pointed in the direction of travel.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is
not a substitute for attentive driving.
G
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
222
Driving systems
Driving and parking
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i
USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Radar se
nso
rs
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
integrated into the front and rear bumpers
and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make
sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by
bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following
a severe impact or in the event of damage to
the bumpers, have the function of the radar
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth-
erwise no longer work properly.
Monitoring area
G
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and
directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the
diagram.
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
the case of:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or
spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-
row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy-
cles, or may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge
of your lane.
Driving systems
223
Driving and parking
Z
Due to the nature of the system:
R
warnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
R
warnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
trucks, for a prolonged time.
Warning display
:
Warning display
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
are then not indicated.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
sponding side lights up red. This warning is
always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind
Spot Assist is not operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
matically adapted to the brightness of the
surroundings.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
gray radar waves propagating backwards
appear next to the vehicle in the assistance
display in the multifunction display. Above a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the
radar waves in the assistance display
changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist
is then ready for use.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change
lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
monitoring range, you receive a visual and
acoustic collision warning. You will then hear
a double warning tone and red warning
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-
ing of red warning lamp :. There are no fur-
ther warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
course-correcting brake application is carried
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
collision.
G
WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
224
Driving systems
Driving and parking
If a course-correcting brake application
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
sounds. In addition, display ; underlining
the danger of a side collision appears in the
multifunction display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. A course-
correcting brake application may be interrup-
ted at any time if you steer slightly in the
opposite direction or accelerate.
The course-correcting brake application is
available in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a course-
correcting brake application adapted to the
driving situation occurs if:
R
there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your vehi-
cle.
R
a vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
R
you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
R
you clearly brake or accelerate.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP
®
or PRE-SAFE
®
Brake.
R
ESP
®
is switched off.
R
a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
X
Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is
activated in the on-board computer
(
Y page 246).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.
Gray radar waves propagating backwards
appear next to the vehicle in the assistance
display in the multifunction display.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
in front of your vehicle by means of multi-
function camera : at the top of the wind-
shield. Various different areas to the front,
rear and side of your vehicle are also moni-
tored with the aid of the radar sensor system.
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on the road and can warn you
before you leave your lane unintentionally. If
you do not react to the warning, a lane-cor-
recting application of the brakes can bring the
vehicle back into the original lane.
This function is available in a speed range
between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
200 km/h).
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the
risk of accident nor override the laws of phys-
ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
account of road and weather conditions. It
may not recognize traffic situations. Active
Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-
ously keep your vehicle in its lane.
G
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
Driving systems
225
Driving and parking
Z
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
R
not give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
R
the radar sensors in the front or rear bump-
ers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g.
obscured by snow
R
there are no, several or unclear lane mark-
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-
struction work
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are strong shadows cast on the road
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
and broken lane markings are detected, no
lane-correcting brake application is made.
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by
means of intermittent vibration in the steer-
ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when nec-
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system recognizes certain con-
ditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-
way.
R
the system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes.
R
you cut the corner on a bend.
Lane-correcting brake application
If you leave your lane, under certain circum-
stances the vehicle will brake briefly on one
side. This is meant to assist you in bringing
the vehicle back to the original lane.
G
WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
cation.
G
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
cases, the system may make an inappropriate
brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-
ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of
an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
226
Driving systems
Driving and parking
there is sufficient distance on the side for
other traffic or obstacles.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
display : appears in the multifunction dis-
play. The brake application also slightly
reduces vehicle speed.
A lane-correcting brake application can be
made after driving over a lane marking rec-
ognized as being solid or broken. Before this,
a warning must be given by means of inter-
mittent vibration in the steering wheel. In
addition, a lane with lane markings on both
sides must be recognized.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detec-
ted in the adjacent lane. The following vehi-
cles can have an influence on brake applica-
tion: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are over-
taking and vehicles that are driving parallel to
your vehicle.
i
A further lane-correcting brake applica-
tion can only occur after your vehicle has
returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs
if:
R
you clearly and actively steer, brake or
accelerate.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
R
you have switched on the turn signal.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP
®
, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
R
you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
R
ESP
®
is switched off.
R
the transmission is not in position D.
R
a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
been detected and displayed.
R
an obstacle in the lane in which you are
driving has been detected.
Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect
other road users or traffic situations. An inap-
propriate brake application may be interrup-
ted at any time if you:
R
steer slightly in the opposite direction
R
switch on the turn signal
R
clearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application is inter-
rupted automatically if:
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP
®
, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
R
lane markings can no longer be recognized.
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X
Press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane
Keeping Assist On message appears in
the multifunction display. If all conditions
have been satisfied, a warning or steering
intervention may be made.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
Driving systems
227
Driving and parking
Z
(Y page 243) are shown in green. Active
Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
X
To switch off: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The
Lane Keeping Assist Off
message
appears in the multifunction display.
Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting
X
In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board
computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist function (Y page 246).
X
Select Standard or Adaptive.
When Standard
is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
When Adaptive
is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
R
you switch on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
R
you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
R
you brake hard.
R
you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when nec-
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system recognizes certain con-
ditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-
way.
R
the system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes.
R
you cut the corner on a bend.
228
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Useful information ............................ 230
Important safety notes ..................... 230
Displays and operation ..................... 230
Menus and submenus ...................... 235
Display messages ............................. 251
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 285
229
On-board computer and displays
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
G
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so and
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do
so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the mul-
tifunction display. You should therefore make
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all
times.
For an overview, see the instrument panel
illustration (
Y page 33).
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The light sensor in the instrument cluster
automatically controls the brightness of the
multifunction display. In daylight, the displays
in the instrument cluster are illuminated. A
dimming function is not possible in daylight.
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle inte-
rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-
trol knob.
The brightness control is located between the
instrument cluster and the COMAND Display
(
Y page 35).
X
Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
or counter-clockwise.
If the light switch (
Y page 126) is set to
Ã, T or L, the brightness is
dependent upon the brightness of the
ambient light.
Tachometer
!
Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
230
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
ing point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature
display indicates the temperature measured
and does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the mul-
tifunction display (
Y page 232).
There is a short delay before a change in out-
side temperature is shown in the multifunc-
tion display.
Coolant temperature display
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
!
A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is above 257
(125 †) do not drive any further. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the lower
section of the tachometer (
Y page 33).
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
perature may rise to 255 (124 †).
Operating the on-board computer
:
Multifunction display
;
Right control panel
=
Left control panel
X
To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Left control panel
ò
R
Opens the menu list
9
:
Press briefly:
R
Scrolls in lists
R
Selects a menu or function
R
In the Radio or Media menu:
opens the track or station list
and selects a station, an audio
track or a video scene
R
In the Telephone menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or a telephone
number
Displays and operation
231
On-board computer and displays
Z
9
:
Press and hold:
R
Scrolls rapidly through all lists
R
In the Radio or Media menu:
selects a station, audio track or
video scene using rapid scrolling
R
In the Telephone menu: starts
rapid scrolling if the phone book
is open
a
R
In all menus: confirms the selec-
ted entry in the list
R
In the Radio or Media menu:
opens the list of available radio
sources or media
R
In the Telephone menu:
switches to the phone book and
starts dialing the selected num-
ber
ñ
R
Switches off the Voice Control
System (see the separate oper-
ating instructions)
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
In the Radio or Media menu:
deselects the track or station list
or list of available radio sources
or media
R
Hides display messages
R
Exits the telephone book/redial
memory
%
Press and hold:
R
Calls up the standard display in
the Trip
menu
Right control panel
~
R
Rejects or ends a call
R
Exits the telephone book/redial
memory
6
R
Makes or accepts a call
R
Switches to the redial memory
W
X
R
Adjusts the volume
8
R
Mute
ó
R
Switches on the Voice Control
System (see the separate oper-
ating instructions)
Multifunction display
:
Top status bar
;
Display
=
Bottom status bar
Display panel ; shows the selected menu or
submenu and display messages.
X
To open the menu list: press the ò
button on the steering wheel.
Display panel ; appears in the menu list.
Possible top status bar displays:
- -
Outside temperature (
Y page 231)
#
Turn signal, left (
Y page 126)
L
Low-beam headlamps (
Y page 125)
K
High-beam headlamps (
Y page 126)
T
Parking lamps and license plate lamps
(
Y page 125)
!
Turn signal, right (
Y page 126)
Possible bottom status bar displays:
è
ECO start/stop function
(
Y page 155)
ë
HOLD function (
Y page 192)
j
Active Parking Assist (
Y page 202)
232
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
_
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
(
Y page 127)
a
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot (
Y page 190)
---
km/h
Additional speedometer
(
Y page 248)
Head-up display
General notes
The head-up display projects information
from the navigation system and the driver
assistance system above the dashboard into
the driver's field of vision.
A requirement for the display of the contents
is that the following functions are available in
the vehicle and are switched on:
R
Cruise control
R
DISTRONIC PLUS
R
Traffic Sign Assist
R
Navigation
The head-up display allows the driver to see
all of the information without having to take
his eyes off the road.
Important safety notes
The head-up display is only an aid and is not a
substitute for attentive driving.
Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are
not always correctly displayed. Traffic signs
always have priority over the Traffic Sign
Assist display.
The visibility of the head-up display is influ-
enced by the following conditions:
R
the driver's seat position
R
the positioning of the display image
R
the general ambient light
R
sunglasses with polarization filters
R
wet roads
R
blocking of sunlight by objects on the dis-
play cover
In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of
the display may fade. This can be reversed by
switching the head-up display off and on
again.
i
Vehicles with the head-up display are
equipped with a special windshield. Should
repairs be necessary, have the windshield
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Displays and operation
Switching the head-up display on or off
X
Press button :.
When the head-up display is switched on,
the display appears in the driver's field of
vision.
Displays and operation
233
On-board computer and displays
Z
Standard displays in the head-up display
The head-up display shows the following contents and information:
:
Navigation messages
;
Current speed
=
Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 182)
Cruise control set speed (
Y page 179)
?
Detected traffic signs
AMG displays in the head-up display
AMG displays are available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
The head-up display shows the following contents and information:
:
Current engine speed
;
Current speed
234
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
=
Upshift indicator
?
Currently selected gear, gearshift options when shifting manually
Setting options
You can make the following settings in the
head-up display submenu:
R
adjust the position of the head-up display
on the windshield (
Y page 247)
R
adjust the brightness of the displays in the
head-up display (
Y page 247)
R
select desired displays in the head-up dis-
play (
Y page 246)
Using the Display Content
function, you
can, depending on your vehicle's equip-
ment, choose between four standard dis-
plays. The selected contents then appear in
the head-up display.
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also
choose between two AMG displays. If you
select an AMG display, the head-up display
shows AMG-specific contents.
If you select a display with traffic signs,
detected traffic signs from Traffic Sign
Assist appear in the head-up display.
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the ò button on the steering wheel
to open the menu list.
Operating the on-board computer
(
Y page 231).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
select the following menu:
R
Trip menu (Y page 235)
R
Navi menu (navigation instructions)
(
Y page 237)
R
Radio menu (Y page 239)
R
Media menu (Y page 240)
R
Telephone menu (Y page 241)
R
Assistance Graphic menu
(
Y page 243)
R
Service menu (Y page 243)
R
Settings menu (Y page 244)
R
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(
Y page 249)
Trip menu
Standard display
X
Press and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the Trip
menu with
trip odometer : and odometer ;
appears.
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-
plays approximate range :.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Trip
menu.
Menus and submenus
235
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
display with approximate range : and cur-
rent fuel consumption ;.
Approximate range : that can be covered is
calculated according to your current driving
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If
there is only a small amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C
appears instead of approximate range :.
Recuperation display = shows you if energy
has been recuperated from the kinetic energy
in overrun mode and saved in the battery.
Recuperation display = depends on the
engine installed and is therefore not available
in all vehicles.
ECO display
The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Trip
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select
ECO Display
.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(
Y page 175).
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
:
Distance
;
Driving time
=
Average speed
?
Average fuel consumption
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Trip
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Select From Start or From Reset
with : or 9.
The values in the From Start
submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey, while
the values in the From Reset
submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (
Y page 237).
In the following cases the trip computer is
automatically reset From Start
:
R
the ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R
999 hours have been exceeded.
R
9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9999 hoursor 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset
.
236
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Digital speedometer
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Trip
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
digital speedometer.
Resetting values
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Trip
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press : to select Yes and confirm with
a.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
R
Trip odometer
R
"From Start" trip computer
R
"From Reset" trip computer
R
ECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are
also reset. If you reset the values in the "From
Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO
display are also reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. You can find
further information on navigation instructions
in the separate operating instructions.
X
Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Navi
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Route guidance not active
:
Direction of travel
;
Current road
Menus and submenus
237
On-board computer and displays
Z
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
:
Distance to the next destination
;
Estimated arrival time
=
Distance to the next change of direction
?
Current road
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to the change of direction
=
Change-of-direction symbol
?
Lane not recommended (dark gray)
A
Possible lane (light gray)
B
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction (white)
On multilane roads, new lane recommenda-
tions can be displayed for the next change of
direction if the digital map supports this data.
During the change of direction, new lanes
may be added.
Lane not recommended ?: you will not be
able to complete the next change of direction
if you stay in this lane.
Possible lane A: you will be able to complete
the next change of direction in this lane only.
Recommended lane B: in this lane you will
be able to complete the next change of direc-
tion and the one after that.
Change of direction without lane recom-
mendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is to be made, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indi-
cator shortens towards the top of the display
as you approach the point of the announced
change of direction. The change of direction
starts once the distance display reaches zero.
238
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Change of direction with lane recommen-
dation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
?
Lane recommendation
Other status indicators of the naviga-
tion system
:
Additional information
Other possible additional information:
R
New Route... orCalculating Route...
A new route is calculated.
R
Road Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized,
e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private
land.
R
No Route
No route could be calculated to the selec-
ted destination.
R
O
You have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
Radio menu
:
Frequency range
;
Station frequency with memory position
=
Name of artist
?
Name of track
A
Genre
The multifunction display shows station ;
with station frequency or station name. The
preset position is only displayed along with
station ; if this has been stored.
X
Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Radio
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Currently set station ; appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
To open the station list: press the : or
9 button briefly.
X
To select a station in the station list:
press the : or 9 button briefly.
X
To select a station in the station list
using rapid scroll: press and hold
the : or 9 button.
Menus and submenus
239
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
To select the frequency range or station
memory: press a briefly.
X
Press : or 9 to select the frequency
range or station memory.
X
Press a to confirm the selection.
i
Store the station in COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
i
SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
Further information on radio operation can
be found in COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
Media menu
Changing the media source
You can change the media source and play-
back mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in
the Media
menu.
X
Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Media
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
To open/close the media sources list:
press a briefly.
The list shows the following media sources,
for example:
R
Disc (CD/DVD)
R
SD memory card
R
Media Register
R
USB storage device
R
Bluetooth
®
capable audio device
Please observe further information on media
support and media operation on COMAND
(see the separate operating instructions).
Operating an audio player or audio
media
:
Media source, e.g. name of current CD
;
Current title
=
Name of artist
?
Name of album
A
Folder name
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment installed in the vehicle.
X
Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Media
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
To select an audio player or data car-
rier: press a briefly.
The list containing the media sources
appears.
X
Press : or 9 to select the corre-
sponding audio player or media.
240
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press a to confirm the selection.
X
To open the track list: press the : or
9 button briefly.
X
To select the next or previous track in
the track list: press the : or 9 but-
ton briefly.
X
To select a track from the track list
using rapid scrolling: press and
hold : or 9 until the desired track is
reached.
If you press and hold the button, the speed
of rapid scroll increases after a short time.
Not all audio drives or data carriers support
this function.
If the corresponding track information is
stored on the audio drive or audio media, the
multifunction display may display the follow-
ing:
R
track number
R
track name
R
artist
R
album
The track information is not available in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Video DVD operation
X
Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Media
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
To select a DVD single drive or DVD
media: press a briefly.
The list containing the media sources
appears.
X
Press : or 9 to select the corre-
sponding DVD single drive or disc.
X
Press a to confirm the selection.
X
To open the scene list: press the : or
9 button briefly.
X
To select the next or previous scene in
the scene list: press the : or 9
button briefly.
X
To select a scene from the scene list
using rapid scrolling: press and
hold : or 9 until desired scene : is
reached.
X
Press a to confirm the selection.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the
legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving.
X
Switch on the mobile phone (see the man-
ufacturer’s operating instructions).
X
Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
Menus and submenus
241
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Establish a Bluetooth
®
connection to
COMAND, see the separate operating
instructions.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Telephone
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display:
R
Phone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
R
Phone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching
for a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the
Telephone
menu, a display message appears
in the multifunction display.
You can accept a call at any time, even if you
are not in the Telephone
menu.
X
Press the 6 button on the steering
wheel to accept an incoming call.
Rejecting or ending a call
You can end or reject a call at any time even if
you are not in the Telephone
menu.
X
Press the ~ button on the steering
wheel to reject or end a call.
Selecting an entry in the phone book
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Telephone
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the :, 9 or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X
Press : or 9 to select the names
one after the other.
or
X
To start rapid scrolling: press and hold
the : or 9 button for longer than
one second.
The names in the phone book are displayed
quickly one after the other.
If you press and hold the : or 9
button for longer than five seconds, the
name appears with the next or previous let-
ter initial letter in the alphabet.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X
If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X
If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X
Press : or 9 to select the number
you want to dial.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X
To exit the telephone book: press the
~ or % button.
242
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Telephone
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
desired name or number.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X
To exit the redial memory: press the
~ or % button.
Assistance graphic menu
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Assistance Graphic
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
The multifunction display shows the
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
assistance graphic.
The assistance graphic shows you the sta-
tus of and/or information from other driv-
ing systems or driving safety systems:
R
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 187)
R
Spotlight function of Night View Assist
Plus (
Y page 247)
R
Distance warning and the autonomous
braking function COLLISION PREVEN-
TION ASSIST PLUS (
Y page 70)
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake (Y page 75)
R
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 222)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 215)
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist
(
Y page 225)
X
Press : to display the ATTEN-
TION ASSIST assessment.
Service menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Service
menu:
R
Calling up display messages in message
memory (
Y page 251)
R
Checking the tire pressure electronically
(
Y page 369)
R
Calling up the service due date
(
Y page 330).
R
Checking the oil level using the on-board
computer (
Y page 327) (only Mercedes-
AMG S 65 model)
Menus and submenus
243
On-board computer and displays
Z
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Settings
menu:
R
Changing assistance settings
(
Y page 244)
R
Changing head-up display settings
(
Y page 246)
R
Changing the light settings (Y page 247)
R
Changing the instrument cluster settings
(
Y page 248)
R
Restoring the factory settings
(
Y page 249)
Assistance submenu
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
Observe the "Important safety notes" section
in the description of ESP
®
(Y page 73).
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the fol-
lowing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
For further information about ESP
®
, see
(
Y page 73).
X
Start the engine.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select
ESP
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
ESP
®
is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up continu-
ously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continu-
ously, ESP
®
is not available due to a malfunc-
tion.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(
Y page 290).
Observe the information on display messages
(
Y page 252).
Automatic activation of Night View Assist
Plus
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open
the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select
Night View Assist
.
244
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press a
again.
If Night View Assist Plus automatic activation
is switched on, the night vision image is auto-
matically shown in the multifunction display if
an object is detected.
For further information about Night View
Assist Plus (
Y page 220).
Activating/deactivating Traffic Sign
Assist
The Traffic Sign Assist
function allows
you to choose whether traffic signs and mes-
sages should be displayed in the lower area of
the speedometer in certain conditions.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select
Traffic Sign Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
If the function is activated, traffic signs and
messages appear in the lower area of the
speedometer.
For further information about Traffic Sign
Assist, see (
Y page 217).
Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Collision Prevention
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press a
again.
When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in
the multifunction display in the Assistance
Graphic menu.
For further information about COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (
Y page 70).
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
PRESAFE
®
Brake is only available for vehi-
cles with the Driving Assistance Plus pack-
age.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select
PRE-SAFE Brake
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction
display in the Assistance Graphic
menu.
For more information on PRESAFE
®
Brake,
see (
Y page 75).
Menus and submenus
245
On-board computer and displays
Z
Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot
Assist
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select
Blind Spot Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
white radar waves propagating backwards
appear next to the vehicle in the Assis‐
tance Graphic.
For further information about Active Blind
Spot Assist, see (
Y page 222).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press : or 9 to select ATTENTION
ASSIST.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press : or 9 to select Off, Stand‐
ard or Sensitive.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the Assistance
Graphic menu in the multifunction display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (
Y page 215).
Activating/deactivating Active Lane
Keeping Assist
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐
sist submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select
Lane Keeping Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection, Standard
or Adap‐
tive, appears.
X
To change the setting: press a again.
For further information about Active Lane
Keeping Assist, see (
Y page 225).
Head-up display submenu
Selecting other displays
:
Vehicle speed display
;
Vehicle speed and navigation instruction
display
=
Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign
Assist
Using the Display Content
function, you
can, depending on your vehicle's equipment,
choose between four standard displays. The
246
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
selected contents then appear in the head-up
display.
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also
choose between two AMG displays. If you
select an AMG display, the head-up display
shows AMG-specific contents.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Head-up
Display submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select Display
Content.
X
Press a to confirm.
A graphic selection list appears.
X
Press : or 9 to select the desired
display.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
Further information on navigation can be
found on COMAND (see the separate operat-
ing instructions).
For further information about Traffic Sign
Assist, see (
Y page 217).
Setting the position
You can adjust the position of the head-up
display on the windshield. You can compen-
sate for height differences if the seat posi-
tions are changed, for example.
X
Switch on the head-up display
(
Y page 233).
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Head-up
Display submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Position
function.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Press : or 9 to adjust the position
to a level from Level +5
to Level -5.
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Using the Memory function, you can save and
call up the set position of the head-up display
as a single memory preset (
Y page 120).
Setting the brightness
The brightness of the head-up display is auto-
matically adjusted to the surrounding ambi-
ent light. You can also individually adjust the
brightness of the head-up display.
X
Switch on the head-up display
(
Y page 233).
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open
the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select the Head-up
Display submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Brightness
function.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Press : or 9 to adjust the bright-
ness to a level from Level +5
(bright) to
Level -5
(dark).
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Light submenu
Switching the spotlight function on/off
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open
the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
Menus and submenus
247
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Spotlight
function.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
When the spotlight function is activated,
the assistance graphic shows the pedes-
trian symbol.
Further information on the spotlight function
(
Y page 221).
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
This function is not available in Canada.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Daytime
Running Lights function.
If the Daytime Running Lights
function
has been switched on, the cone of light and
the W symbol in the multifunction dis-
play are shown in white.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running
lamps Daytime Running Lights
(Y page 124).
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting the distance unit
The Display
Unit Speed-/Odometer func-
tion allows you to choose whether certain
displays appear in kilometers or miles in the
multifunction display.
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐
ment Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer
func-
tion.
The current setting km
or Miles appears.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for dis-
tance applies to:
R
speedometer
R
digital speedometer in the Trip menu
R
additional speedometer in the status area
of the multifunction display.
The unit in the additional speedometer is
displayed inversely to the selected dis-
tance unit.
R
odometer and trip odometer
R
the trip computer
R
the current consumption and the range
R
navigation instructions in the Navi menu
R
cruise control
R
SPEEDTRONIC
R
DISTRONIC PLUS
R
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot
R
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Switching the additional speedometer
on/off
The Additional Speedometer [km/h]
function allows you to choose whether the
status area in the multifunction display shows
the speed digitally. The unit in the additional
speedometer is always inverse to the speed-
ometer unit.
248
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open
the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐
ment Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Addi‐
tional Speedometer [km/h] function.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press a
again.
Restoring the factory settings
X
Press ò on the steering wheel to open
the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the Settings
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Factory
Settings submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings?
function
appears.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select No
or Yes.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
If you have selected Yes
, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Lights submenu is
only reset when the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
WARMUP
:
Digital speedometer
;
Gear indicator
=
Upshift indicator
?
Transmission fluid temperature
A
Engine oil temperature
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
to select the AMG
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP
=
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine/transmission oil temperature:
when the engine and transmission are at nor-
mal operating temperature, oil tempera-
ture ? and A are displayed in white in the
multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
ature ? or A in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
put during this time.
Menus and submenus
249
On-board computer and displays
Z
SETUP
:
Drive program C, S or M
;
ESP
®
mode (ON/OFF)
=
Suspension setting (SPORT/COMFORT)
X
Press the ò button on the steering
wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG
menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button until the
SETUP display appears.
250
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.
You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message
memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
R
HOLD function (Y page 192)
R
Parking (Y page 170)
Hiding display messages
X
Press a or % on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X
Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.
X
Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the message memory.
If there are no display messages, the No Messages
display appears in the multifunction
display.
When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages
251
On-board computer and displays
Z
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Currently Unavail‐
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program),
BAS (Brake Assist), PRESAFE
®
, the HOLD function, Hill Start
Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping
Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE
®
Brake, PRESAFE
®
PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have
failed.
In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ABS, ESP
®
, BAS, PRESAFE
®
, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,
Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist
and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE
®
Brake, PRESAFE
®
PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have
failed.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷ and ! warn-
ing lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
252
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ESP
®
, BAS, PRESAFE
®
, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,
Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist
and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE
®
Brake, PRESAFE
®
PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have
failed.
The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
253
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
Currently Unavail‐
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual
ESP
®
, BAS, PRESAFE
®
, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,
Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist
and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE
®
Brake, PRESAFE
®
PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have
failed.
The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
254
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
T!
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP
®
, BAS,
PRESAFE
®
, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist,
STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind
Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE
®
Brake, PRESAFE
®
PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have
failed.
In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F(USA
only)
!(Canada
only)
Turn On the Igni‐
tion to Release
the Parking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
lights up.
You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-
tion was switched off.
X
Switch on the ignition.
F(USA
only)
!(Canada
only)
Please Release
Parking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (
Y page 172).
You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(
Y page 172).
Display messages
255
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
F(USA
only)
!(Canada
only)
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X
Shift the selector lever to position P.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 172).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 384).
X
Shift the selector lever to position P.
X
Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
256
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec-
onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released.
It then goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:
X
Shift the selector lever to position P.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 172).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Shift the selector lever to position P.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
257
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
F(USA
only)
!(Canada
only)
Parking
Brake Inop‐
erative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec-
onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released.
It then goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
voltage or undervoltage.
X
Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X
Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking
brake:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA
only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Shift the selector lever to position P.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
$(USA
only)
J(Canada
only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
sounds.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
258
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
Check Brake Pad
Wear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
USA only: the red $ brake system warning lamp also lights up
while the engine is running.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G
Inoperative
One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-
tioning.
X
Have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Collision Preven
tion Assist Plus
Currently Unavail‐
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-
tional. Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range.
R
the on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Restart the engine.
Collision Preven
tion Assist Plus
Inoperative
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative
due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐
tive See Opera‐
tor's Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE
®
have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
259
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PRE-SAFE Functions
Currently Limited
See Operator's Man
ual
PRESAFE
®
PLUS or PRESAFE
®
Brake is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range.
R
the on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
PRESAFE
®
PLUS and PRESAFE
®
Brake are operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Restart the engine.
PRE-SAFE Functions
Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manual
PRESAFE
®
PLUS or PRESAFE
®
Brake is unavailable due to a mal-
function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
260
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Radar Sensors
Dirty See Opera‐
tor's Manual
At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys-
tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:
R
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
R
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist
R
Active Blind Spot Assist
R
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist
will not perform a course-correcting brake application.
Possible causes are:
R
the sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty
R
the function of the driving system and/or driving safety system
is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears. All driving systems and driving safety systems
are operative again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 335):
R
in the radiator trim
R
in the front bumper
R
in the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear
bumper
X
Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.
Display messages
261
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
SRS Malfunction
Service Required
The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights
up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
For further information about the restraint system, see
(
Y page 44).
6
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
Required or Front
Right Malfunction
Service Required
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or
right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
ter.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
Required or Rear
Right Malfunction
Service Required
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or
right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
ter.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required
or Right Side Cur
tain Airbag Mal
function Service
Required
There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-
tain air bag.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-
gered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
262
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled
See Operator's Man
ual
The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even
though:
R
an adult
or
R
a person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger
seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-
pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-
imately six seconds
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light
up and remain lit. If the ind
icator lamp is on, OCS has disabled
the front-passenger front air bag (
Y page 54)
R
the display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag
Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the
multifunction display.
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON
indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas-
sifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
Display messages
263
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (
Y page 54).
Front Passenger
Airbag Enabled See
Operator's Manual
The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
though:
R
a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-
tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
R
the front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G
WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Open the front-passenger door.
X
Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X
Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat u
noccupied and ignition switched on:
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-
imately six seconds
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light
up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front
air bag (
Y page 54)
R
the display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag
264
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the
multifunction display.
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON
indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas-
sifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (
Y page 54).
Lights
i
Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the
lamp have failed.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Left Corner
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering
Light
The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Low
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Rear Left
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right
Turn Signal
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
265
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Front Left
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right
Turn Signal
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Mirror
Turn Signal or
Check
Right Mirror
Turn Signal
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is
defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Brake
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp
The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Center Brake
Lamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Tail
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps
The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check
Right Tail Lamp
The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left High
Beam or Check
Right High Beam
The left or right-hand high beam is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
License Plate Lamp
The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
266
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Front Left
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right
Parking Lamp
The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Backup Light
The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Daytime
Running Light or
Check Right Day
time Running Light
The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The active light function is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Operator’s Manual
The exterior lighting is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
The light sensor is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off Lights
You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. A
warning tone also sounds.
X
Turn the light switch to position Ã.
Display messages
267
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Switch On Headlamps
You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.
X
Turn the light switch to position L or Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus Inoper
ative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus Cur
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man
ual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily
inoperative. Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X
Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive
Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again message
is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again.
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
Check Coolant
Level See Opera‐
tor's Manual
The coolant level is too low.
!
Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(
Y page 328).
X
If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
?
The fan motor is faulty.
X
At coolant temperatures below 257 (125 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
268
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 257 (125 †). Other-
wise, the engine could be damaged.
X
Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X
If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 255 (124 †).
#
See Operator's Man
ual
The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
R
a defective alternator
R
a torn poly-V-belt
R
a malfunction in the electronics
!
Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
269
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
Stop Vehicle See
Operator's Manual
The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level
is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Start Engine See
Operator's Manual
The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window defroster and interior lighting.
X
Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long dis-
tance.
The battery is being charged.
4
Check Engine Oil
At Next Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
!
Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(
Y page 325).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 327).
X
Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
you need to add engine oil more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
270
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
4
Check Engine Oil
Level (Add 1 quart)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
!
Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(
Y page 325).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 327).
X
Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
you need to add engine oil more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4
Engine Oil Level
Low Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Check the engine oil level (Y page 325).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 327).
8
Fuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
C
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8
Gas Cap Loose
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
271
On-board computer and displays
Z
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
ATTENTION ASSIST:
Take a Break!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue
or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
also sounds.
X
If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
ATTENTION ASSIST
Inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
¨
Vehicle Rising
Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
¨
Vehicle Rising
Please Wait
The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
X
Do not pull away.
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
¨
Stop Vehicle Vehi‐
cle Too Low
You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
period.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front
fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement
is too large.
X
Listen for scraping sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the
vehicle.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
272
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¨
Malfunction
The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char-
acteristics may be affected.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABC Malfunction
Stop Vehicle
The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display
message disappears.
The multifunction display continuously shows the display mes-
sage.
The vehicle is leaking oil.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The multifunction display continuously shows the display mes-
sage.
Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front
fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement
is too large.
X
Listen for scraping sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ABC Vehicle Rising
Please Wait Briefly
The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
X
Do not pull away.
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
ABC Malfunction
The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted. The vehicle's
handling characteristics may be affected.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
273
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist Cur
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man
ual
Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inop-
erative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period.
R
the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Clean the windshield.
Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist Inoper
ative
Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Restart the engine.
Active Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
274
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Park Assist Can
celed
The driver's door is open.
X
Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with
the driver's door closed.
You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-
vention was active.
X
While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-
function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP
®
has intervened.
X
Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 202).
Park Assist Inoper
ative
PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.
X
Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with
PARKTRONIC" section (
Y page 202).
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.
X
Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.
If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol
is not shown in the multifunction display):
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist
Switched Off
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
Night View Assist
Currently Unavail‐
able
Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
the camera in the radiator trim is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
the outside temperature is too high.
X
Clean the windshield.
X
Clean the camera in the radiator trim.
If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem-
peratures, the system will switch back on automatically once it has
cooled down.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Night View Assist Plus is operational again.
Display messages
275
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Night View Assist
Inoperative
Night View Assist Plus is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Spotlight Inopera‐
tive
Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
the camera in the radiator trim is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
the outside temperature is too high.
X
Clean the windshield.
X
Clean the camera in the radiator trim.
If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem-
peratures, the system will switch back on automatically once it has
cooled down.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Night View Assist Plus is operational again.
Night View Assist Plus is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X
Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic Sign
Assist Inoperative
Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
Off
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 192).
DISTRONIC PLUS Off
DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 182).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
276
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS Now
Available
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(
Y page 182).
DISTRONIC PLUS Cur
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man
ual
DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range.
R
the on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Restart the engine.
DISTRONIC PLUS
Inoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.
The following may have also failed:
R
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
R
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS Sus
pended
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS
- - - mph
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.
X
Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(
Y page 182).
Display messages
277
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DTR+: Steering
Assist. Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period.
R
the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Clean the windshield.
DTR+: Steering
Assist. Inopera‐
tive
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.
However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
Inoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
- - - mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X
If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X
Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 179).
278
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Please Correct
Tire Pressure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X
Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 369).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 371).
Check Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (
Y page 342).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 369).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Display messages
279
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Warning Tire Mal
function
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G
WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
R
a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
R
you could lose control of the vehicle.
R
continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (
Y page 342).
Tire Press. Moni‐
tor Currently
Unavailable
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,
no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire
pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X
Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
TirePress. Sen
sor(s) Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X
Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Mon
itor Inoperative
No Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X
Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Moni‐
tor Inoperative
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
280
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or
'N' to Start Engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position R or D.
X
Shift the selector lever to position P or N.
Apply Brake to
Shift from 'P'
You have attempted to shift the selector lever to position D, R or N
without depressing the brake pedal.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or
N, Depress Brake
and Start Engine
With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the
selector lever out of position P or N into another transmission
position.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Start the engine.
Transmission Not
in P Risk of Vehi‐
cle Rolling Away
The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the selector lever
is in position R, N or D.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Shift the selector lever to position P.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Close the driver's door completely.
Only Shift to 'P'
when Vehicle is
Stationary
The vehicle is moving.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the selector lever to position P.
Service Required
Do Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Display messages
281
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Reversing Not Pos
sible Service
Required
You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a mal-
function.
The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal
function Stop
A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission com-
ponents.
A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to
position N.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the selector lever to position P.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being
charged.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X
Until then, shift the selector lever to position P before you switch
off the engine.
X
Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
N
The trunk lid is open.
X
Close the trunk lid.
M
The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Close the hood.
C
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Close all the doors.
282
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
_
Lock Seat Backrest
Front Left or Lock
Seat Backrest
Front Right
The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A
warning tone also sounds.
X
Push the backrest back until it engages.
Ð
Power Steering Mal
function See Oper‐
ator's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X
If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X
If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/
receiver range.
X
Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
¥
Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
X
Add washer fluid (Y page 329).
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
Use the correct SmartKey.
Â
Take Your Key from
Ignition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
X
Remove the SmartKey.
Â
Obtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
283
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Replace Key Battery
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X
Change the battery (Y page 86).
Â
Don't Forget Your
Key
The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the
driver's door with the engine switched off.
This display message is displayed in the multifunction display for a
maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.
X
Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â
Key Not Detected
(white display mes-
sage)
The SmartKey is currently undetected.
X
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
Â
Key Not Detected
(red display message)
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Locate the SmartKey.
X
Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-
sage.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,
the key is not detected whilst the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key
mode.
Â
Remove 'Start' But
ton and Insert Key
The SmartKey is continually undetected.
The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or
is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
284
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some
indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.
These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after
starting the engine or whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for
6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten
their seat belts.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addi-
tion, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
285
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as
the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a
secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is
being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a
secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
286
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
$J
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp
is lit while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics
may be affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-
ces.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp
is lit while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-
ces.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$
N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is
running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the
# symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
287
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore
BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVEN-
TION ASSIST PLUS, ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program), PRESAFE
®
,
PRESAFE
®
PLUS, PRESAFE
®
Brake, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,
Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active
Blind Spot Assist are also deactivated.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions
listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The
braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems,
such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be
available.
288
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS with
Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP
®
,
PRESAFE
®
, PRESAFE
®
PLUS, PRESAFE
®
Brake, the HOLD function, Hill Start
Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions
listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,
for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The
braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
289
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
$J
÷!
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the
yellow ESP
®
warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the
engine is running.
ABS and ESP
®
are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS, BAS
PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD,
PRESAFE
®
, PRESAFE
®
PLUS, PRESAFE
®
Brake, the HOLD function, Hill Start
Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions
listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,
for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The
braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP
®
or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or
at least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X
When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (
Y page 74), it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 73).
290
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS, PRESAFE
®
, PRESAFE
®
PLUS, PRESAFE
®
Brake, the HOLD
function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane
Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunc-
tion.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions
listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
å
N The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is switched off, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g.
Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting
brake applications.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (
Y page 74), it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 73).
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
291
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
F!
N F (USA only) or ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the
electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the
electric parking brake is lit.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is faulty.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unin-
tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop imme-
diately.
For further information about the restraint system, see (
Y page 44).
292
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
;
N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
R
in the engine management
R
in the fuel injection system
R
in the exhaust system
R
in the ignition system
R
in the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emer-
gency mode.
X
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
i
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop
as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the
legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such
legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly
or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X
If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
293
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the bar display.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any
circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
294
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked
or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine
has cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(
Y page 328).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 257
(125 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous
terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A
warning tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 255 (124 †). The airflow to the
engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G
WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can
occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
295
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine
has cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(
Y page 328).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X
At coolant temperatures below 257 ‡(125 †), you can continue driving to
the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous
terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A
warning tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your
line of travel at too high a speed.
X
Be prepared to brake immediately.
X
Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on PRESAFE
®
Brake (Y page 75).
For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (
Y page 71).
296
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
h
N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale
for the TPMS is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the
tires.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers.
Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(
Y page 342).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 369).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale
for the TPMS flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G
WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
297
On-board computer and displays
Z
Vehicle
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
Ð
N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X
If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.
298
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Useful information ............................ 300
Stowage areas ................................... 300
Features ............................................. 304
299
Stowage and features
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
cle are dependent on the distribution of the
load within the vehicle. For this reason, you
should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
R
Never exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
weight rating of the vehicle (including occu-
pants). The values are specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar of the
driver's door.
R
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
R
Position heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
sible and as low down in the trunk as pos-
sible.
R
The load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the seat backrests.
R
Always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
R
Secure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges
for protection.
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-
ing or abruptly changing directions.
R
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-
tions.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
300
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
R
Close lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
R
Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300).
Stowage compartments in the front
Glove box
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X
To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
The glove box can be cooled (
Y page 147).
The glove box contains
R
a coin holder
R
a pen holder
R
three credit card holders
R
a holder for the COMAND remote control
The glove box can only be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
X
To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 9 clockwise to position
2.
X
To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise
to position 1.
Eyeglasses compartment
X
To open: press marking :.
The eyeglasses compartment opens down-
wards.
X
To close: press marking : again and the
eyeglasses compartment returns upwards
and engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartments in the center con-
sole
X
To open: briefly press marking ;.
X
To close: push stowage compartment :
in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
Stowage areas
301
Stowage and features
Z
Stowage compartment under the armrest
X
To open: press button : or ; and fold the
armrest to the left or right.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USB
port, an AUX-IN jack or a Media Interface are
installed in the stowage compartment. A
Media Interface is a universal interface for
portable audio or video equipment, e.g. for an
iPod
®
, iPhone
®
or MP3 player (see the sepa-
rate COMAND operating instructions).
Stowage compartments in the doors
You can store items such as a rolled up fluo-
rescent jacket and a small umbrella in stow-
age compartment ; in the doors.
In doors : you can store bottles with a capa-
city of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).
Stowage space in the rear
Stowage compartment in the rear seat
armrest
X
To open: fold down the seat armrest.
X
Pull handle : and fold the armrests
upwards.
Stowage compartment in the rear-com-
partment center console
X
To open: if required, fold up the rear seat
armrest.
X
Slide cover : in the direction of the arrow.
Stowage box in the rear seat backrest
!
Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
302
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
X
To open: fold down the rear armrest.
X
Pull handle : and fold down cover ;.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a DVD
player is installed instead of a stowage com-
partment.
Stowage nets
Stowage nets are located:
R
in the front-passenger footwell
R
on the back of the driver's and the front-
passenger seat
R
on the left and right-hand side in the trunk
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 300)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (
Y page 300).
Securing loads using parcel net hooks
General notes
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
R
Secure the load using the parcel net hooks.
R
Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
R
Do not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
R
Pad sharp edges for protection.
Trunk
There are four parcel net hooks in the trunk.
Stowage well under the trunk floor
Under the trunk floor you can find a multi-
purpose recess, e.g. for TIREFIT.
X
To open: open the trunk lid.
X
Holding the ribbing, press handle : down-
wards.
Handle : folds upwards.
X
Swing trunk floor ; upwards using han-
dle : until it rests against the trunk parti-
tion.
Stowage areas
303
Stowage and features
Z
X
Fold out hook = on the underside of the
trunk floor.
X
Clip hook = into groove ?.
X
To close: unclip hook = from groove ?.
X
Fasten hook = to the bracket on the
underside of the trunk floor.
X
Fold the trunk floor down.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-
ing or abruptly changing directions.
R
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-
tions.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
R
Close lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
R
Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300).
!
Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
!
Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
Cup holder in the front-compartment
center console
X
To open: open the stowage compartment
(
Y page 301).
X
Open the protective flap if necessary.
X
To remove: slide catch : forwards and
pull the cup holder upwards.
304
Features
Stowage and features
X
To insert: make sure that the protective
flap is closed.
X
Insert the cup holder and slide catch :
back.
You can remove the cup holder and the rub-
ber mat for cleaning. Clean them with clean,
lukewarm water only.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
!
Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
!
Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.
X
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X
To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X
To fold out: place a container in the cup
holder.
The cup holder folds down automatically.
X
To fold in: remove the container.
The cup holder folds in automatically.
X
To close: slide cup holder : or ; back
until it engages.
Sun visors
Overview
G
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
:
Mirror light
;
Bracket
=
Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
?
Vanity mirror
A
Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A
has been folded up.
Glare from the side
Features
305
Stowage and features
Z
X
Fold down sun visor :.
X
Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
X
Swing sun visor : to the side.
X
Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
Rear window roller sunblind
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller
sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a
risk of injury.
When extending or retracting make sure that
no parts of the body are in the sweep of the
roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again
if someone becomes trapped. The opening or
closing process is briefly stopped. The roller
sunblind then returns to its initial position.
!
Make sure that the roller sunblind can
move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged.
At temperatures below Ò4 ‡(Ò20 †) the roller
sunblind cannot be operated.
Extending/retracting from the driver's
seat
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
To extend or retract: briefly press but-
ton :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X
To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
X
To open: briefly press marking ?.
Stowage compartment = opens.
X
To remove the insert: grip the sides of
insert :, push it forward and pull it
upwards ;.
X
To re-install the insert: press insert :
into the drawer until it engages.
X
To close: press stowage compartment =
closed until it locks.
Cigarette lighter
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
306
Features
Stowage and features
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
R
the hot cigarette lighter falls
R
a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
mit.
Cigarette lighter in the front compart-
ment
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
To open: briefly press marking =.
Stowage compartment ; opens.
X
Press in cigarette lighter :.
Cigarette lighter : will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
X
To close: press stowage compartment ;
closed until it locks.
12 V sockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-
ries include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures
that there is sufficient power to start the
engine.
Socket in the front-compartment center
console
X
To open: briefly press marking =.
Stowage compartment ; opens.
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
X
To close: press stowage compartment ;
closed until it locks.
Socket in the rear compartment
Features
307
Stowage and features
Z
X
To open: open the stowage compartment
(
Y page 302).
X
Open socket cover : or ;.
X
To close: close the cover of the stowage
compartment.
Socket in the trunk
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Coolbox in the rear compartment
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you cover the ventilation grille for the cool-
box, it may overheat. There is a risk of fire.
Always make sure that the ventilation grille is
not covered.
The ventilation grille for the coolbox is in the
trunk.
The coolbox can bear a maximum load of
7.7 lb (3.5 kg).
If you want to store a bottle in the upper com-
partment of the coolbox, the capacity of the
bottle must not exceed 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l).
Store only plastic bottles in the upper com-
partment of the coolbox.
Using the coolbox
X
Vehicles with rear seat armrest: fold
down the rear seat armrest.
X
Pull handle : and fold down cover ;.
X
To open: pull handle : on the cover.
X
Fold the cover out to the front.
X
To switch cooling level to low: press but-
ton ; once.
An indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X
To switch cooling level to high: press
button ; twice.
Both indicator lamps in the button light up.
X
To switch off cooling: press button ;
repeatedly until the indicator lamps go out.
The cooling output of the coolbox depends on
the ambient temperature and the selected
cooling level.
The coolbox reduces its cooling output or
switches off, if:
R
many electrical consumers are turned on
R
the starter battery is not sufficiently
charged
308
Features
Stowage and features
This is indicated by the flashing indicator
lamps in the button. The cooling function will
automatically switch back on as soon as there
is sufficient voltage.
Caring for the coolbox
If you do not need to use the coolbox for an
extended period you should switch it off,
defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave
the lid open for a time.
Removing and installing the coolbox
You can remove the coolbox for maintenance
purposes.
X
To remove: switch off the coolbox.
X
Pull plug ; down and out.
X
Unscrew both screws =.
X
Pull out the coolbox.
X
Close flap :.
X
To install: swing flap : to the side until it
is locked in place by the magnets.
X
Insert the coolbox.
X
Tighten both screws =.
X
Connect plug ;.
mbrace
General notes
The mbrace system is only available in the
USA.
You must have a license agreement to acti-
vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
system is activated and operational. To log in,
press the ï MB Info call button. If any of
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the
system may not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hot-
lines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
Shortly after successfully registering with the
mbrace service, a user ID and password will
be sent to you by mail. You can use this pass-
word to log onto the mbrace area under "Own-
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
R
it has been activated and is operational
R
the corresponding mobile phone network is
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
tomer Center
R
a service subscription is available
R
the starter battery is sufficiently charged
Determining the location of the vehicle on a
map is only possible if:
R
GPS reception is available.
R
the vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X
Press the W or X button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Use the COMAND volume control.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
R
Automatic and manual emergency call
R
Roadside Assistance call
R
MB Info call
You can find information and a description of
all available features under "Owners Online"
at http://www.mbusa.com.
Features
309
Stowage and features
Z
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detec-
ted if one of the following occurs:
R
The indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
R
The indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-diag-
nosis of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in one or more of the
following buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
-
SOS button
-
F Roadside Assistance call button
-
ï MB Info call button
R
The Inoperative or the Service Not
Activated message appears in the multi-
function display after the system self-diag-
nosis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expec-
ted. In the event of an emergency, help will
have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
Emergency call
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergency if:
R
you see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
R
the vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
R
the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
vehicle in accordance with national regula-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 309).
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered. You cannot end an automatically
triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been ini-
tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call
message
appears in the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected
message appears in the
multifunction display.
310
Features
Stowage and features
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
R
current location of the vehicle (as deter-
mined by the GPS system)
R
vehicle identification number
R
information on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been ini-
tiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Customer Assis-
tance Center and the vehicle occupants.
R
If the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
R
If there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center, the system has been unable to initiate
an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
tinuously.
The Call Failed
message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
X
To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : briefly to open.
X
Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
flashes until the emergency call is conclu-
ded.
X
Wait for a voice connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter.
X
After the emergency call, close cover :.
If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
mbrace will not be able to make the emer-
gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi-
ately after pressing the SOS button, you will
not know whether mbrace placed the emer-
gency call. In this case, always summon assis-
tance by other means.
Roadside Assistance button
X
To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-
side Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active.
The Connecting
Call message appears in
the multifunction display. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
Features
311
Stowage and features
Z
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
current location of the vehicle
R
vehicle identification number
The COMAND display indicates that a call is
active. During the call, you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button
on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(
Y page 315).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Benz technician or makes arrangements for
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
You can find more information in the separate
mbrace manual.
The system has not been able to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call, if:
R
the indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance
call button F is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed
message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding COMAND button
for ending a phone call.
MB Info call button
X
To call MB Info: press MB Info call but-
ton :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The Connecting
Call message appears in
the multifunction display. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
current location of the vehicle
R
vehicle identification number
The COMAND display indicates that a call is
active. During the call, you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button
on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.
You can find further information on the
mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
312
Features
Stowage and features
The system has not been able to initiate an
MB Info call, if:
R
the indicator lamp in MB Info call button
ï is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed
message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding COMAND button
for ending a phone call.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
gency call will take priority and override all
other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
R
the ~ button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel
R
the corresponding button in COMAND to
end the voice call
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
muted.
The mobile phone is no longer connected to
COMAND.
However, if you want to use your mobile
phone, do so only when the vehicle is station-
ary and in a safe location.
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access
to a database with over 15 million points of
interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
know the destination, the address can be
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-
tant destinations in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with
up to four way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
to the address entered.
X
SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and sub-
sequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
If you select No
the address can be stored in
the address book.
The destination download function is availa-
ble if:
R
the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system.
R
the relevant mobile phone network is avail-
able and data transfer is possible.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-
age and cannot be purchased separately.
You can use the route assistance function
even if the vehicle is not equipped with a nav-
igation system.
Within the framework of this service, you
receive a professional and reliable form of
navigation support without having to leave
your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
current position and the desired destination.
You will then be guided live through the cur-
rent route section.
Features
313
Stowage and features
Z
Search & Send
General notes
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
equipped with mbrace and a navigation sys-
tem. Additionally, an mbrace service sub-
scription must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-
vice. A destination address which is found on
Google Maps
®
can be transferred via mbrace
directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
Specifying and sending the destination
address
X
Go to the website http://
maps.google.com and enter a destination
address into the entry field.
X
To send the destination address to the
e-mail address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the
website.
Example:
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
will be sent to your vehicle.
X
When the "Send" dialog window appears:
Enter the e-mail address you specified
when setting up your mbrace account into
the corresponding field.
X
Click "Send".
Information on specific commands such as
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
website.
Calling up a transmitted destination
address
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
The transmitted destination address is loa-
ded into the vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking
whether navigation should be started.
X
SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and sub-
sequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
If you select No
the address can be stored in
the address book.
If you have sent more than one destination
address, each individual destination must
be confirmed separately.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same
order as the order in which they were sent.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles
with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be
sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and
a replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote unlock-
ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
remotely.
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is avail-
able if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and a data connection is possible.
X
Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
X
Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
314
Features
Stowage and features
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
R
the Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
R
the telephone application (e.g. for iPhone
®
,
Android)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
Vehicle remote closing
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be
used when you have forgotten to lock the
vehicle and you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, remote closing may
be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days
the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.
The vehicle remote closing feature is availa-
ble if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and a data connection is possible.
X
Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
Locked Remotely message appears in the
multifunction display.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
R
the Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
R
the telephone application (e.g. for iPhone
®
,
Android)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X
Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X
This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter contacts you and the local law enforce-
ment agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency
is informed of the location of the vehicle.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center is automatically
notified.
Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
port for problems with your vehicle. During an
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center.
The customer service representative can use
the received data to decide what kind of
assistance is required. You are then, for
example, guided to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle
is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
Center.
The Roadside Assistance Connected
message appears in the display. If the Vehicle
Health Check can be started, the Request
for Vehicle Diagnostics Received
Start vehicle diagnostics? message
appears in the display.
Features
315
Stowage and features
Z
X
Press the Yes button to confirm the mes-
sage.
X
When the Vehicle Diagnostics
Please Start Ignition message
appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
If the Please follow the instruc‐
tions received by phone and move
your vehicle to a safe position.
message appears: please follow the
instructions received by phone and move
your vehicle to a safe position.
The message in the display disappears.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
During this procedure, you will see the
Vehicle
Diagnostics Active message.
If you select Cancel
, the Vehicle Health
Check is canceled completely.
When the check is complete, the Sending
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice
connection may be interrupted dur‐
ing data transfer) message appears. The
vehicle data can now be sent.
X
Press the OK button to confirm the mes-
sage.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated.
The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐
ring Data... message appears.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service rep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice con-
nection is re-established after the transfer is
complete. If necessary, you will be contacted
at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-
mail or phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check
is the transfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance Center. If a service is due, the dis-
play shows a message to this effect together
with information about any special offers at
your workshop.
This information can also be called up under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(
Y page 28).
Information on Roadside Assistance
(
Y page 24).
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer
and save predefined routes in the navigation
system.
A route can be prepared and sent by either a
customer service representative or under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Each route can include up to four way points.
Once a route has been received by the navi-
gation system, you will see the The
<Route
name> external route has been saved
to "Previous Destinations". Would
you like to start navigation? message
on the COMAND display.
The route is saved.
X
To start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the
display.
If you select No
the saved route can be
called up later in the navigation menu.
X
Select Start.
Route guidance starts.
Downloaded and saved routes can be called
up again.
You can find further information in the sepa-
rate COMAND/Audio 20 operating instruc-
tions.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-
cle, a message will be sent to the Customer
Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance
Center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive
this information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
316
Features
Stowage and features
The data you receive contains the following
information:
R
the location where the speed limit was
exceeded
R
the time at which the speed limit was
exceeded
R
the selected speed limit which was excee-
ded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-
daries of the selected areas. You can select
the way in which you receive this information
beforehand. Possible options include text
message, e-mail or an automated call.
The area can be determined as either a circle
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas simultane-
ously. Different settings are possible for each
area.
These settings can be called up under "Own-
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service representa-
tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
text message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the vehi-
cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink
®
garage door opener integra-
ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper-
ate up to three different door and gate sys-
tems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only
on garage doors that:
R
have safety stop and reverse features and
R
meet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating
instructions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not
run the engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated
garage door opener, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
R
HomeLink
®
hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free
of charge)
More information on HomeLink
®
and/or
compatible products is also available online
at http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(
Y page 26).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener, per-
sons in the range of movement of the garage
door can become trapped or struck by the
garage door. There is a risk of injury.
Features
317
Stowage and features
Z
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
Programing
Programming buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 317).
Garage door remote control A is not inclu-
ded with the integrated garage door opener.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to
control the garage door drive.
X
To start programming mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the inte-
grated garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in program-
ming mode. After a short time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is programming for
the first time. If the selected button has
already been programmed, indicator
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten
seconds have elapsed.
X
Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X
To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards
buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at
a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
X
Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is
to synchronize the rolling code
(
Y page 318).
X
Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the correspond-
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When
doing so, vary the distance between remote
control A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(
Y page 317).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in t
he rear-view mirror. To do this you
will need to use the programming button on
the door drive control panel. The program-
ming button may be positioned in different
places depending on the manufacturer. It is
usually located on the door drive unit on the
garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door
drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-
318
Features
Stowage and features
gramming of additional remote controls",
before carrying out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the
door or gate.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Get out of the vehicle.
X
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-
tiate the next step.
X
Get into the vehicle.
X
Press previously programmed button ;,
= or ? on the integrated garage door
opener multiple times until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then
complete.
Notes on programming the remote con-
trol
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long
enough for the integrated garage door
opener. The signal is not recognized during
programming. Comparable with Canadian
law, some U.S. garage door openers also fea-
ture a "break".
Proceed as follows:
R
if you live in Canada
R
if you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) when using the programming
steps
X
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
X
Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X
Press button B of garage door remote
control A for two seconds, then release it
for two seconds.
X
Press button B again for two seconds.
X
Repeat this sequence on button B of
remote control A until indicator lamp :
lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is
to synchronize the rolling code.
X
Release button B of remote control A of
the garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programming process for the correspond-
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When
doing so, vary the distance between remote
control A and the rear-view mirror.
The
required distance bet
ween remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programing
the integrated garage door opener on the
rear-view mirror, take note of the following
instructions:
R
Check the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter
frequency can usually be found on the back
of the garage door drive remote control.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
operate in the frequency range of 280 to
433 MHz.
R
Replace the batteries in garage door
remote control A. This increases the like-
lihood that garage door remote control A
will transmit a strong and precise signal to
the integrated garage door opener.
Features
319
Stowage and features
Z
R
When programming, hold remote control
A at varying distances and angles from the
button which you are programming. Try var-
ious angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances.
R
If another remote control is available for the
same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote con-
trol. Before performing these steps, make
sure that new batteries have been installed
in garage door drive remote control A.
R
Note that some remote controls only trans-
mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-
cator lamp on the remote control goes out).
Press button B on remote control A again
before transmission ends.
R
Align the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control.
Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as
long as the button is pressed. The trans-
mission is halted after a maximum of ten
seconds and indicator lamp : lights up
yellow.
X
Press button ;, = or ? again if neces-
sary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling
the vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X
Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X
Driver's seat/front-passenger seat:
slide the respective seat back.
X
Rear seats: slide the respective seat for-
wards.
X
To install: place the floormat in the foot-
well.
320
Features
Stowage and features
X
Press studs : onto retainers ; until you
hear them engage.
X
To remove: pull the floormat from retain-
ers ;.
X
Remove the floormat.
Infrared reflective windshield
The infrared reflecting glass prevents the
vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also
blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz
range.
In order to operate radio-controlled equip-
ment, e.g. toll systems, areas : on the wind-
shield are permeable to radio waves. You can
install radio-controlled devices in these
areas.
These areas can best be seen from outside
the vehicle by observing the light reflected off
the windshield.
Features
321
Stowage and features
Z
322
Useful information ............................ 324
Engine compartment ........................ 324
ASSYST PLUS .................................... 330
Care .................................................... 331
323
Maintenance and care
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G
WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
G
WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
injury.
Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
is switched on.
Opening the hood
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
324
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
!
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield
wipers or the hood.
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X
Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
X
Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-
dle ; up and lift the hood.
Once you have lifted the hood about
15 inches (40 cm), it is automatically
opened the rest of the way and held open
by the gas-filled struts.
Closing the hood
X
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X
Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
R
park the vehicle on a level surface.
R
the engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
R
if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
stick (except Mercedes-AMG S 65 mod-
els)
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Engine compartment
325
Maintenance and care
Z
Example
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X
If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =
or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine
oil.
326
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
Checking the oil level using the on-board computer (Mercedes-AMG S 65 models)
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
X
Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
X
Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.
X
Use : or 9 to select theEngine Oil Level submenu.
X
Press a to confirm the selection.
The Measuring
Engine Oil Level Accurate Only When Vehicle Is Levelmessage
appears in the multifunction display.
The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the
multifunction display:
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Engine Oil Level OK
The oil level is correct.
Check Engine Oil
Level (Add 1 Liter)
The oil level is too low.
X
Add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.
Reduce Engine Oil
Level
The engine oil level is too high.
X
Have excess engine oil siphoned off.
For Engine Oil
Level Ignition
Must Be On
The ignition is switched off.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Need More Time to
Check Engine Oil
Level
The required waiting period was not observed.
X
If the engine is at normal operating temperature: repeat the
measurement after about five minutes.
If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the
engine was only started briefly: repeat the measurement after
approximately 30 minutes.
Engine Oil Level
Not Measurable
with Engine Running
The engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
If the engine is at normal operating temperature: wait about five
minutes before carrying out the measurement.
If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the
engine was only started briefly: wait approximately 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Adding engine oil
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Engine compartment
327
Maintenance and care
Z
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
H
Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
!
Only use engine oils and oil filters that
have been approved for vehicles with a ser-
vice system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
R
using engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for the
service system
R
replacing engine oil and oil filters after
the interval for replacement specified by
the service system has been exceeded
R
using engine oil additives.
!
Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
excess engine oil siphoned off.
Example
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X
Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
X
Replace cap : on the filler neck and
tighten clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
X
Check the oil level again with the oil dip-
stick (
Y page 325).
Further information on engine oil
(
Y page 403).
Additional service products
Checking coolant level
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurized, par-
ticularly when the engine is warm. When
328
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
X
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
cle is on a level surface and the engine has
cooled down.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
or
X
Press Start/Stop button twice
(
Y page 151).
X
Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 (70 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position
0 (
Y page 151) in the ignition lock.
or
X
Remove Start/Stop button from ignition
lock (
Y page 151).
X
Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
clockwise and allow excess pressure to
escape.
X
Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
neck when warm, there is enough coolant
in expansion tank ;.
X
If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(
Y page 404).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
X
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X
Place cap : on the edge of the filler neck
and engage in place.
Engine compartment
329
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X
To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
appears in the multifunction display prompt-
ing you to add washer fluid (
Y page 283).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (
Y page 405).
ASSYST PLUS
Service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (
Y page 325).
The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.:
R
Service A in .. Days
R
Service A Due
R
Service A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A
or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, indicates the type
of service. A
stands for a minor service and B
for a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is disconnec-
ted.
Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule:
X
Note down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before discon-
necting the battery.
or
X
After reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
X
Press the a or % button on the steer-
ing wheel.
Displaying service messages
X
Switch the ignition on.
X
Use ò on the steering wheel to call up
the list of menus.
X
Press the 9 or : button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Service
menu and
press a to confirm.
X
Press the 9 or : button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS
sub-
menu and press a to confirm.
The service due date appears in the multi-
function display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
!
If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set-
ting can be corrected at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-
erwise lead to increased wear and damage
to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
330
ASSYST PLUS
Maintenance and care
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
after the service work has been carried out.
You can also obtain further information on
maintenance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions
or increased load on the vehicle, mainte-
nance work must be carried out more fre-
quently, for example:
R
regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops
R
if the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
R
use in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
R
if the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must
be checked more often. Further information
can be obtained at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
H
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ner.
!
For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following:
R
dry, rough or hard cloths
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
solvents
R
cleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
!
Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after clean-
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents rec-
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
!
If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
cally in certain situations.
Care
331
Maintenance and care
Z
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-
vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-
tion in the following or other similar situa-
tions:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
!
Make sure that:
R
the side windows are fully closed.
R
the ventilation/heating is switched off
(the OFF button has been pressed).
R
the windshield wiper switch is at position
0.
R
the 360° camera or rear view camera is
switched off.
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following
situations, for example, could lead to the
unintentional opening of the trunk:
R
using a car wash
R
using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
!
Make sure that the automatic transmis-
sion is in neutral position N when washing
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The
vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
R
Operating with the SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock. Do not open the driver's
door when the engine is switched off or
at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in
transmission position D or R the auto-
matic transmission will automatically
switch to park position P and block the
wheels.
R
Operating with the Start/Stop button:
Do not open the driver's door when the
engine is switched off or at very low
speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission
position D or R the automatic transmis-
sion will automatically switch to park
position P and block the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position N
neutral:
Operating with the SmartKey:
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake, if nec-
essary.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
Operating with the Start/Stop but
ton:
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Engage park position P.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Remove Start/Stop button from ignition
lock (
Y page 151).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake, if nec-
essary.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshield and the wiper
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
332
Care
Maintenance and care
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
shield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each coun-
try.
X
Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X
Use a soft sponge to clean.
X
Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
X
Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
X
Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X
Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Power washers
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about
the correct distance is available from the
equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
R
tires
R
door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
R
electrical components
R
battery
R
connectors
R
lights
R
seals
R
trim
R
ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following
situations, for example, could lead to the
unintentional opening of the trunk:
R
using a car wash
R
using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
Cleaning the paintwork
!
Do not affix:
R
stickers
R
films
R
magnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
quate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards.
Care
333
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
X
Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X
Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
This is the case approximately every three to
five months, depending on the climate con-
ditions and the care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
X
Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
!
Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
shine.
!
The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
R
strong rubbing of the paintwork with
unsuitable materials
R
frequent use of automatic car washes
R
washing the vehicle in direct sunlight
!
Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-
ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
wax. These products are only suitable for
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
with matte finish leads to considerable sur-
face damage (shiny, spotted areas).
Always have paintwork repairs carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
The vehicle should preferably be washed by
hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of water.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz
care products.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
!
Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after clean-
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked.
334
Care
Maintenance and care
Cleaning the windows
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
!
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
windows.
!
Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain circumstan-
ces prevent water from draining away. This
can lead to corrosion damage and damage
to electronic components.
X
Clean the inside and outside of the win-
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
product that is recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
!
Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.
!
Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
!
Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield (
Y page 131).
X
Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic light lenses.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Mirror turn signals
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
!
If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a dis-
tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufac-
turer.
Care
335
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
To open the cover of the rear view cam-
era: with COMAND activated call up the
vehicle menu: press the Ñ button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide ¬ the
controller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select Rear View Camera: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select Open Camera Cover: turn and
press the controller.
The rear view camera cover opens.
X
To clean the rear view camera: use clear
water and a soft cloth to clean camera
lens :.
Cleaning the 360° camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the 360° camera with a power
washer.360
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
To open the cover of the 360° camera:
with COMAND activated, call up the vehicle
menu: press the Ñ button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide ¬ the
controller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select the 360° Camera: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select Open Camera Cover: turn and
press the controller.
The cover of the 360° camera opens.
X
To clean the 360° camera: clean camera
lens : with clean water and a soft cloth.
If you drive at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0
336
Care
Maintenance and care
or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360°
camera closes automatically.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
!
Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-
ter and after washing.
X
Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
!
For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
lowing:
R
alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
commercially-available household clean-
ing agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-
ble damage to the display.
X
Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
X
Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially available microfiber cloth and
TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X
Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
fiber cloth.
Cleaning Night and Day View Assist
Cleaning the camera behind the wind-
shield
!
Never clean the camera lens. When clean-
ing the field of vision of the driving systems,
make sure that you do not spray glass
cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera
lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X
Fold down the camera cover by recess :.
X
Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in
front of camera ;.
Care
337
Maintenance and care
Z
Cleaning the camera in the radiator trim
Camera lens : is cleaned at regular intervals
by operating the windshield washer system.
X
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens : when it is very dirty.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
!
Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-
ces:
R
stickers
R
films
R
scented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
!
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
X
Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
ments
!
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of
damaging the surface.
!
Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and
can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
when cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
!
Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen-
uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA
covers. If used often, these can damage the
cover.
Note that regular care is essential to ensure
that the appearance and comfort of the cov-
ers is retained over time.
338
Care
Maintenance and care
Genuine leather seat covers
!
To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
R
Clean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
ers down with a dry cloth.
R
Make sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked.
R
Only use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
R
differences in the texture
R
marks caused by growth and injury
R
slight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
!
Observe the following when cleaning:
R
clean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
R
clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
results depend on the type of dirt and
how long it has been there.
R
clean DINAMICA covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G
WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
!
Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X
Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
tion.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
X
Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or dry shampoo.
X
Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
ing agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Care
339
Maintenance and care
Z
340
Useful information ............................ 342
Where will I find...? ........................... 342
Flat tire .............................................. 342
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 347
Jump-starting .................................... 351
Towing and tow-starting .................. 354
Fuses .................................................. 356
341
Breakdown assistance
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Where will I find...?
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
Apart from certain country-specific varia-
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a
tire-change tool kit. If the vehicle is equipped
with tire-changing tools, these are located in
the stowage well under the trunk floor. Some
tools for changing a wheel are specific to the
vehicle. For more information on which tire
changing tools are required and approved to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example:
R
Jack
R
Wheel chock
R
Lug wrench
R
Ratchet wrench
R
Alignment bolt
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
Example
:
Tire sealant filler bottle
;
Towing eye
=
Tire inflation compressor
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 303).
X
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 344).
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
R
tires with run-flat characteristics
(MOExtended tires) (
Y page 343)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires
R
a TIREFIT kit (Y page 342)
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
be obtained from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Information on changing/mounting a wheel
(Y page 383).
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
342
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(
Y page 170).
X
If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock (
Y page 151).
or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition
lock:
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X
Make sure that the engine cannot be star-
ted via your smartphone (
Y page 154).
X
Make sure that the passengers are not
endangered as they do so. Make sure that
no one is near the danger area while a
wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not
directly assisting in the wheel change
should, for example, stand behind the bar-
rier.
X
Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
fic conditions when doing so.
X
Close the driver's door.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. The affected
tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-
bearing capacity and the speed index
(
Y page 377).
MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
junction with an active tire pressure monitor.
If a pressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
R
observe the instructions in the display mes-
sages (
Y page 279).
R
check the tire for damage.
R
if driving on, observe the following notes.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
vehicle is partially laden and approximately
18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon:
R
vehicle speed
R
road condition
R
outside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving condi-
tions/maneuver, or it can be increased
through a moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat
mode
i
s counted from the moment the tire pressure
loss warning appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
i When replacing one or all tires, please
observe the following specifications for
your vehicle's tires:
R
size
R
the type and
R
the "MOExtended" mark
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
replaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-
ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-
ure. Make sure that you use the proper size
and type (summer or winter tire).
i
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
factory. It is therefore recommended that
you additionally equip your vehicle with a
Flat tire
343
Breakdown assistance
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
R
you hear banging noises.
R
the vehicle starts to shake.
R
you see smoke and smell rubber.
R
ESP
®
is intervening constantly.
R
there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-
peratures down to Ò4 (Ò20 †).
G
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
R
there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
R
the wheel rim is damaged.
R
you have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
R
If the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
R
If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
!
Do not operate the tire inflation compres-
sor for longer than eight minutes at a time
without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
ated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety
instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation
compressor.
344
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
Using the TIREFIT kit
X
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
nails.
X
Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-
tion compressor from the stowage well
underneath the trunk floor (
Y page 342).
X
Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within
the driver's field of vision.
X
Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
X
Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out
of the housing.
X
Screw hose A onto flange B of tire seal-
ant bottle :.
X
Place tire sealant bottle : head down-
wards into recess ; of the tire inflation
compressor.
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X
Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X
Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
(
Y page 307) in your vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 151).
X
Press on and off switch = on the tire infla-
tion compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
on. The tire is inflated.
i
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X
Allow the tire inflation compressor to run
for five minutes. The tire should then have
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure reached" (
Y page 346).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has not been attained after five minutes, see
"Tire pressure not reached" (
Y page 346).
i
If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It
can then be removed like a layer of film.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene
at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.
Flat tire
345
Breakdown assistance
Z
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
X
Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X
Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G
WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire
sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part
of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
instrument cluster in the driver's field of
vision.
!
Residue from the tire sealant may come
out of the filler hose after use. This could
cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
H
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has been attained after five minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
X
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
inflation compressor.
X
Pull away immediately.
X
Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i
In cases such as the one mentioned
above, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-
ada).
X
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B-pillaror the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
X
To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
346
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
X
To reduce the tire pressure: depress
pressure release button E next to pres-
sure gauge F.
X
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the filler hose from the valve of the sealed
tire.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of
the sealed tire.
X
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the tire changed there.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as
soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Battery (vehicle)
12 V battery important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery, e.g.
removal and installation. You should there-
fore have all work involving the battery car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program). The oper-
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
i
For further information about ABS and
ESP
®
, see (Y page 68) and (Y page 73).
All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles:
G
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-
starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. A build-
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for
example:
R
by wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
R
due to friction between clothing and seats
R
if you push or pull the battery across the
carpet or other synthetic materials
R
if you wipe the battery with a cloth
Battery (vehicle)
347
Breakdown assistance
Z
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con-
tact with vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a bat-
tery.
R
It is important that you observe the descri-
bed order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
All vehicles:
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
!
Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Main-
tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop for more information.
!
Always have work on the batteries carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be
absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-
volt battery yourself, please observe the
following:
R
secure the vehicle to prevent it from roll-
ing away.
R
you switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. Make sure the ignition is
switched off. Check that all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster are off.
Otherwise, electronic components, such
as the alternator, may be damaged.
R
you first remove the negative terminal
clamp and then the positive terminal
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-
tem may be damaged.
R
the transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The vehi-
cle is secured against rolling away. You
can then no longer move the vehicle.
The batteries and the covers of the positive
terminal clamps must always be installed
securely during operation.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
348
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro-
sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes
or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and face-
guard.
Immediately rinse electrolyte or
acid splashes off with clean water.
Contact a physician if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehi-
cle occupants from suffering acid burns
should the battery be damaged in the event of
an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
mum possible service life, it must always be
sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the
vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-
nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You
can also charge the battery with a charger
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop for further infor-
mation.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop if you wish to leave your
vehicle parked for a long period of time.
i
Remove the SmartKey if you park the
vehicle and do not require any electrical
co
nsumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
power.
Charging the battery
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
!
Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.4 V.
All other vehicles:
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
!
Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
All vehicles:
!
Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
Battery (vehicle)
349
Breakdown assistance
Z
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (
Y page 351).
X
Open the hood.
X
Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor bat-
tery in the jump-starting procedure
(
Y page 351).
Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not
lean over a battery. Never charge the battery
if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you
use a battery charger which has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery
charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-
Benz vehicles and tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory.
It permits the charging of the battery in its
installed position. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion and availability. Read the battery charg-
er's operating instructions before charging
the battery.
All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles: if the indicator/warning lamps in the
instrument cluster do not light up at low tem-
peratures, it is very likely that the discharged
battery has frozen. In this case you may nei-
ther jump-start the vehicle nor charge the
battery. The service life of a thawed-out bat-
tery may be shorter. The starting character-
istics can be impaired, particularly at low tem-
peratures. Have the thawed-out battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low tempera-
tures, do not charge a battery which has been
removed using a battery charger. Allow the
battery to warm up gently first, if necessary.
Otherwise, the service life can be shortened
and the starting characteristics impaired,
especially at low temperatures.
350
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
R
It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither
charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
All vehicles:
Jump-starting
351
Breakdown assistance
Z
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
R
The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
R
You may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
R
Keep away from fire and open flames.
R
Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
R
All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles: do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
R
Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
R
Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
R
Do not lean over the battery.
R
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
R
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
R
the jumper cables are not damaged.
R
when the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
R
the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X
Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 151). All indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it (
Y page 151).
X
Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X
Open the hood.
Example: ground point cover
X
Turn fasteners : one Õ turn and remove.
X
Remove the cover whilst pressing down on cap ; of the washer fluid reservoir.
352
Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
Position number D identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X
Slide cover C of positive terminal = in the direction of the arrow.
X
Connect positive terminal = on your vehicle to positive terminal ? of donor battery D
using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal = on your own vehicle first.
X
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X
Connect negative terminal A of donor battery D to ground point B of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery D first.
X
Start the engine.
X
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X
First, remove the jumper cables from ground point B and negative terminal A, then from
positive clamp = and positive terminal ?. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X
Close cover C of positive clamp = after removing the jumper cables.
X
Replace the ground point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positioned
precisely beneath the corresponding recesses in the cover.
X
Press fasteners : into the mountings until they engage.
X
Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i
Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting
353
Breakdown assistance
Z
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
R
the engine is not running.
R
the brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
R
there is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.
G
WARNING
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident.
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
G
WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
R
the towing eye could detach itself
R
the vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
over.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the per-
missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (
Y page 399).
!
When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-
matically in certain situations. To avoid
damage to the vehicle, deactivate these
systems in the following or similar situa-
tions:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Make sure that the electric parking brake
is released. If the electric parking brake is
faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the
towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle
could become damaged.
!
Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
purposes as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle w
ith a crane.
!
When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
!
Shift the automatic transmission to N and
do not open the driver's or front passeng-
er's door during towing. The automatic
transmission may otherwise shift to posi-
tion P, which could damage the transmis-
sion.
!
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
!
The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-
age, have it transported on a transporter or
trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in posi-
tion N when the vehicle is being towed.
354
Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
If the automatic transmission cannot be shif-
ted to position N, have the vehicle transpor-
ted on a transporter or trailer.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
R
cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
R
cannot release the electric parking brake
R
cannot shift the automatic transmission to
position N
i
Deactivate the automatic locking feature
(
Y page 90). You could otherwise be locked
out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are
located in the bumpers. They are at the front
and at the rear under covers :.
X
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit/stowage tray (
Y page 342).
X
Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X
Remove cover : from the opening.
X
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as
it will go and tighten it.
Removing the towing eye
X
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X
Attach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X
Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/
stowage tray.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(
Y page 354).
The automatic transmission automatically
shifts to position P when you open the driver's
or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
In order to ensure that the automatic trans-
mission stays in position N when towing the
vehicle, you must observe the following
points:
X
You must use the SmartKey instead of the
Start/Stop button (
Y page 151).
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in posi-
tion 0.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(
Y page 126).
i
In order to signal a change of direction
when towing the vehicle with the hazard
warning lamps switched on, use the com-
bination switch as usual. In this case, only
the indicator lamps for the direction of
travel flash. After resetting the combina-
Towing and tow-starting
355
Breakdown assistance
Z
tion switch, the hazard warning lamp starts
flashing again.
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be
towed with the rear axle raised.
!
The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP
®
could other-
wise damage the brake system.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be towed with the rear axle raised.
The vehicle/trailer combination may oth-
erwise swerve or even roll over.
Transporting the vehicle
!
You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion P.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
tion lock and remove it.
X
Secure the vehicle.
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed
away with both axles on the ground or be loa-
ded up and transported.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear
axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported
on a truck or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical
system: if the battery is defective, the auto-
matic transmission will be locked in position
P. To shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N, you must provide power to the vehi-
cle's electrical system in the same way as
when jump-starting (
Y page 351).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow-started. You could other-
wise damage the automatic transmission.
i
Information on "Jump-starting"
(
Y page 351).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
356
Fuses
Breakdown assistance
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in
the trunk (
Y page 358).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
tems could be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Before changing a fuse
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(
Y page 170).
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
(
Y page 151).
or
X
When using the SmartKey, turn the Smart-
Key to position 0 in the ignition lock and
remove it (
Y page 151).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
R
Fuse box on the driver's side of the dash-
board
R
Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
R
Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
R
Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side
of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction
of travel
Dashboard fuse box
!
Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the dash-
board. You could damage the dashboard or
the cover.
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
X
Open the driver's door.
X
To open: pull cover : outwards in the
direction of the arrow and remove it.
X
To close: clip in cover : on the front of the
dashboard.
X
Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-
well
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
Fuses
357
Breakdown assistance
Z
X
Open the front-passenger door.
X
Fold cover : down and remove it.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
X
Open the hood.
X
To open: release retaining clamps : and
remove cover ;.
X
Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X
Undo screws = on the fuse box.
X
Remove fuse box cover ? forwards.
X
To close: check whether the seal is lying
correctly in cover ?.
X
Insert cover ? at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
X
Fold down cover ? of the fuse box and
tighten screws =.
Fuse box in the trunk
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
358
Fuses
Breakdown assistance
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
To open: release cover : at the top right
and left-hand sides with a flat object.
X
Open cover : downwards in the direction
of the arrow.
i
The fuse allocation chart is located in a
recess at the side of the fuse box. You can
find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse
type on the fuse allocation chart.
Engine emergency off
If the engine cannot be switched off as descri-
bed, observe the following procedure:
X
Take the fuse allocation chart from the fuse
box in the trunk (
Y page 358).
X
Search for “Emergency engine shutdown”
in the fuse allocation chart.
X
Remove the fuses listed under "Emergency
engine shutdown".
Fuses
359
Breakdown assistance
Z
360
Useful information ............................ 362
Important safety notes ..................... 362
Operation ........................................... 362
Winter operation ............................... 364
Tire pressure ..................................... 365
Loading the vehicle .......................... 372
All about wheels and tires ............... 376
Changing a wheel .............................. 383
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 388
361
Wheels and tires
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
R
designation
R
model
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
R
designation
R
manufacturer
R
model
G
WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
R
do not drive with a flat tire.
R
immediately replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
R
pay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
used correctly can impair the operating
safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop and inquire about:
R
suitability
R
legal stipulations
R
factory recommendations
Information on the sizes and types of wheels
and tires for your vehicle can be found under
"Wheel/tire combinations" (
Y page 388).
Information on tire pressure can be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard on the B-pillar (
Y page 372)
R
on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap (
Y page 168)
R
under "Tire pressure" (Y page 365)
Operation
Information on driving
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
pect that a tire is defective, reduce your
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
as possible to check the wheels and tires for
damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
causing the unusual handling characteristics.
If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or
362
Operation
Wheels and tires
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-
erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,
may be damaged.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as
well as after driving off-road or on rough
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam-
age such as:
R
cuts in the tires
R
punctures
R
tears in the tires
R
bulges on tires
R
deformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (
Y page 363). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
pressure as necessary (
Y page 365).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
R
Driving style
R
Tire pressure
R
Distance covered
Notes on tire tread
G
WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Marking : shows where the bar indicator
(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the
tire tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once a tread depth of
Operation
363
Wheels and tires
Z
approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been
reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn
that it must be replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
R
Only mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(
Y page 343).
R
Only mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels.
R
Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach
their full performance after this distance.
R
Do not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
R
Replace the tires after six years at the lat-
est, regardless of wear.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
junction with an active tire pressure monitor
and only on wheels specifically tested by
Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
a flat tire (
Y page 343).
i
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
factory. It is therefore recommended that
you additionally equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (
Y page 383).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehi-
cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
cold temperatures could cause cracks to
form, thereby damaging the tires perma-
nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
responsibility for this type of damage.
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
M+S tires
G
WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use win-
ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-
364
Winter operation
Wheels and tires
ditions. Only these tires will allow driving
safety systems such as ABS and ESP
®
to
function optimally in winter. These tires have
been developed specifically for driving in
snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling charac-
teristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted M+S tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page 368).
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(
Y page 371).
Snow chains
G
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
never install snow chains to the front
wheels
R
always install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that
have been specially approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
R
Snow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (
Y page 388).
R
Only use snow chains when driving on
roads completely covered by snow.
Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-
ble when you come to a road that is not
snow-covered.
R
Local regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-
ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
R
On vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 197) or
Active Body Control (ABC) (
Y page 194),
you must drive at raised vehicle level if
snow chains have been installed.
R
When snow chains are installed, never use
Active Parking Assist (
Y page 202).
You may wish to deactivate ESP
®
(Y page 74)
when pulling away with snow chains installed.
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
controlled manner, achieving an increased
driving force (cutting action).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
the tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
R
the tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steer-
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
ing the spare wheel:
R
monthly, at least
R
if the load changes
R
before beginning a long journey
R
under different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
Tire pressure
365
Wheels and tires
Z
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
i
The specifications on the sample Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire pres-
sure tables are examples. Tire pressure
specifications are vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data shown here. The tire
pressure specifications that are valid for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire pres-
sure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
:
Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(
Y page 372).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
are valid for the maximum permissible load
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
table for different numbers of occupants and
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
seats may differ.
366
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size
and can be found on the tire sidewall
(
Y page 377).
If the tire pressures have been set to the
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower
road speeds, the pressures should be reset to
the higher values:
R
if you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
R
if you want to drive at higher road speeds
i
The tire pressures for increased loads
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
G
WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
R
Check the tire for foreign objects.
R
Check whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gage to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the
tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the
electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pres-
sure can be checked in the on-board com-
puter.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
ent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three
hours and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-
ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct
the tire pressure if it is too low for the current
operating conditions. If you check the tire
pressure when the tires are warm, the result-
ing value will be higher than if the tires were
cold. T
his is normal. Do not reduce the tire
pressure to the value specified for cold tires.
The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap
Tire pressure
367
Wheels and tires
Z
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
R
overheat, leading to tire defects
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
R
increase the braking distance
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on ride comfort
R
be more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
:
Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the rec-
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
when adjusting the tire pressure
(
Y page 365).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(
Y page 365).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard on the B-pillar
R
on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap (
Y page 168)
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pres-
sure, proceed as follows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked.
X
Press the tire pressure gage securely onto
the valve.
368
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
X
Read the tire pressure and compare it to
the recommended value on the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the tire
pressure table (
Y page 365).
X
If the tire pressure is too low, increase the
tire pressure to the recommended value.
X
If the tire pressure is too high, release air.
To do so, press down the metal pin in the
valve, using the tip of a pen for example.
Then check the tire pressure again using
the tire pressure checker.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X
Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the
tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-
sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops
in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure
monitor only functions if the corresponding
sensors are installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
of driving, the current tire pressure of each
tire is shown in the Service
menu of the mul-
tifunction display, see illustration (example).
For information on the message display, refer
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally" section (
Y page 370).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once every two
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,
you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a
substitu
te for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
Tire pressure
369
Wheels and tires
Z
minated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of incom-
patible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(
Y page 365). Note that the correct tire pres-
sure for the current operating situation must
first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
warning threshold for the warning message is
aligned to the reference values taught-in.
Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-
ing the pressure of the cold tires
(
Y page 371). The current pressures are
saved as new reference values. As a result, a
warning message will appear if the tire pres-
sure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(
Y page 365).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering maneuvers.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-
ing pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether
the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-
cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the
tire pressure monitor is ma
lfunctioning:
R
if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is signif-
icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is
not malfunctioning.
R
if the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(
Y page 279).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc-
tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica-
ted. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire
pressure warning lamp flashing for approx-
imately one minute and then remaining lit.
When the malfunction has been rectified, the
tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a
few minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at a gas station with a pressure gage.
The tire pressures shown by the on-board
computer refer to those measured at sea
level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-
ues indicated by a pressure gage are higher
than those shown by the on-board computer.
In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio trans-
mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,
two-way radios) that may be being operated
in or near the vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (
Y page 151).
X
Use ò on the steering wheel to call up
the list of menus.
X
Press 9 or : on the steering wheel
to select the Service
menu.
X
Press the a button.
370
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
X
Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐
sure .
X
Press the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
displayed after driving a few
minutes message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
the tire pressure value to the individual
wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
Monitor Active message is shown instead
of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures
are already being monitored.
Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
sages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message
is shown in the multifunction display and the
yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
comes on.
R
If the Please Correct Tire Pressure
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is
too low and must be corrected at the next
opportunity.
R
If the Check Tires message appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in
one or more tires has dropped significantly
and the tires must be checked.
R
If the Warning Tire Malfunction mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in one or more tires has
dropped suddenly and the tires must be
checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the display messages in the "Tires" section
(
Y page 279).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota-
ted, the tire pressures may be displayed for
the wrong positions for a short time. This is
rectified after a few minutes of driving, and
the tire pressures are displayed for the cor-
rect positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
the currently set tire pressures as the refer-
ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the
tire pressure monitor will automatically
detect the new reference values after you
have changed the tire pressure. However, you
can also define reference values manually as
described here. The tire pressure monitor
then monitors the new tire pressure values.
X
Set the tire pressure to the value recom-
mended for the corresponding driving sit-
uation on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver's side
B-pillar (
Y page 365).
Additional tire pressure values for different
loads can also be found on the tire pressure
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(
Y page 365).
X
Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
X
Use ò on the steering wheel to call up
the list of menus.
X
Press 9 or : on the steering wheel
to select the Service
menu.
X
Press the a button.
X
Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐
sure .
X
Press the a button.
The current tire pressure for each wheel or
the Tire
pressure will be displayed
after driving a few minutes message
Tire pressure
371
Wheels and tires
Z
will be displayed in the multifunction dis-
play.
X
Press the : button.
The Use Current Pressures as New
Reference Values message appears in
the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures
are within the specified range. The new tire
pressures are then accepted as reference
values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCC ID: MRXGG4
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC: 2546A-GG4
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum permis-
sible vehicle load. It also contains details
of the tire sizes and corresponding pres-
sures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can
also find information about the maximum
gross axle weight rating on the front and
rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the maxi-
mum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
:
B-pillar, driver's side
372
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
X
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
load and luggage must not exceed the speci-
fied value.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The maximum permis-
sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-
specific and may differ from that in the
illustration. You can find the valid maximum
permissible gross vehicle weight rating for
your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard.
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X
Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capa-
city calculated in step 4.
Loading the vehicle
373
Wheels and tires
Z
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are
using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard (
Y page 372).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Example 1
Step 1
R
Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2
R
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 5
R
Distribution of the occupants
-
Front: 2
-
Rear: 3
R
Weight of the occupants
-
Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)
-
Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)
-
Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)
-
Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)
-
Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
R
Total weight of all occupants: 750 lbs (340 kg)
Step 3
R
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants):
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)
Example 2
Step 1
R
Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2
R
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 3
R
Distribution of the occupants
-
Front: 1
-
Rear: 2
374
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
R
Weight of the occupants
-
Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
-
Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg)
-
Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg)
R
Total weight of all occupants: 540 lbs (245 kg)
Step 3
R
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants):
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)
Example 3
Step 1
R
Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2
R
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 2
R
Distribution of the occupants:
-
Front: 1
R
Weight of the occupants
-
Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)
R
Total weight of all occupants: 150 lbs (68 kg)
Step 3
R
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants):
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(
Y page 372).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all
passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight
(if applicable) must not exceed the permissi-
ble gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the
maximum permissible weight that can be car-
ried by one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi-
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight
rating), have your loaded vehicle (including
driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if
applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle
weighbridge.
Loading the vehicle
375
Wheels and tires
Z
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
U.S. government specifications. Their pur-
pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-
ble information on tire performance data. Tire
manufacturers have to grade tires using three
performance factors: : tread wear grade, ;
traction grade and = temperature grade.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality
grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applica-
ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum tire width.
Example:
R
Treadwear grade: 200
R
Traction grade: AA
R
Temperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the
statutory safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, ser-
vice practices and differences in road char-
acteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
G
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
!
Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
The traction grades from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
ces.
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
ing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
tires. Observe the legally required minimum
tire tread depth (
Y page 363). Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
The braking distance is still much further than
376
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S
tires) (
Y page 364).
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C. They represent the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
pate heat when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview
:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(
Y page 381)
;
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(
Y page 380)
=
Maximum tire load (Y page 380)
?
Maximum tire pressure (Y page 368)
A
Manufacturer
B
Tire material (Y page 381)
C
Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-
city and speed rating (
Y page 377)
D
Load index (Y page 379)
E
Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire
in addition to the tire name (sales designa-
tion) and the manufacturer's name.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
All about wheels and tires
377
Wheels and tires
Z
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
vehicle tires according to European manufac-
turing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S. manu-
facturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure
that are only designed for temporary use in an
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
size ratio between the tire height and tire
width and is shown in percent. The aspect
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by
the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man-
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam-
eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A
is a numerical code that specifies the maxi-
mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (
Y page 372).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can
bear. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see
(
Y page 380).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (
Y page 379).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in t
he example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and
adapt your driving style to the traffic condi-
tions.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
378
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Index Speed rating
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
The service specification is made up of
load-bearing index A and speed rating B.
R
If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifica-
tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to
find out the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
R
The size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specifi-
cation must be given in parentheses. Exam-
ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating
"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of
the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask
the tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Index Speed rating
H M+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i
Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill
the requirements of the Rubber Manufac-
turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the
tire traction on snow. They have been espe-
cially developed for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-
tory may be higher than the maximum speed
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (
Y page 388).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may also be imprinted on the side-
wall of the tire. You will find this after the let-
1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
All about wheels and tires
379
Wheels and tires
Z
ter that identifies the speed rating
(
Y page 377).
R
If no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard
load (SL) tire
R
XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
R
Light Load: represents a light load tire
R
C, D, E: represents a load range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum per-
missible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (
Y page 372).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible
for the purchaser to easily identify the affec-
ted tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-
cation code ;, tire size =, tire type code ?
and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with
the requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manu-
facturer identification code ; provides
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols.
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
by the manufacturer as a code to describe
specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of ma
nufa
cture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
2008.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
380
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tire
cord and the number of layers in sidewall :
and under tire tread ;.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the U S Department of Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehi-
cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. The quality
grading assessment is made by the manufac-
turer following specifications from the U.S.
government. The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to
the tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
maximum permissible ve
hicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed
on the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-
gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-
ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed
the gross
vehi
cle weight rating GVWR as
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
All about wheels and tires
381
Wheels and tires
Z
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories, occu-
pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-
tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
R
the curb weight of the vehicle
R
the weight of the accessories
R
the load limit
R
the weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-
lent of 1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-
city more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equip-
ment including the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
tioning system and optional equipment if
these are installed in the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load rating is the maximum
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for
which a tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an
outward force to each square inch of the
tire's
su
rface. The tire pressure is specified in
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
be corrected when the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
coming loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-
382
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
performance battery, are not included in the
curb weight and the weight of the accesso-
ries.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used
by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-
tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is
level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(
Y page 342) contains information and notes
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics"
(
Y page 343).
Rotating the wheels
G
WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
!
On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are loca-
ted in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
near the valve. This could damage the elec-
tronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(
Y page 384).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels
according to the intervals in the tire manu-
facturer's warranty book in your vehicle docu-
ments. If no warranty book is available, the
tires should be rotate every 3,000 to 6,000
miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Earlier may be
necessary, depending on the degree of tire
wear. Do not change the direction of wheel
rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac-
tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary
(
Y page 371).
Changing a wheel
383
Wheels and tires
Z
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
of hydroplaning. These advantages can only
be gained if the tires are installed correspond-
ing to the direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Make sure that "normal" level is selected
for AIRMATIC (
Y page 197).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X
Remove Start/Stop button from ignition
lock (
Y page 151).
or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition
lock:
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X
Make sure that the engine cannot be star-
ted via your smartphone (
Y page 154).
X
If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle.
X
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(
Y page 342).
The folding wheel chock is an additional
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
X
Fold both plates upwards :.
X
Fold out lower plate ;.
X
Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
X
On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
384
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
X
On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
!
The jack is designed exclusively for jack-
ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the
vehicle:
R
To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
R
The jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
forming maintenance work under the vehi-
cle.
R
Avoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
R
Before raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
R
The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be
used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip
underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
R
Do not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
R
Make sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
R
Never place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
R
Do not lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
R
Do not open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
R
Make sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Vehicles with AMG wheels and hub caps:
the hub cap covers the wheel
bolts. Before
you can un
screw the wheel bolts, you must
remove the hub cap. Two different variants
can be installed.
Vehicles with AMG wheels and plastic
hub caps:
Changing a wheel
385
Wheels and tires
Z
X
To remove: turn the center cover of hub
cap : counter-clockwise and remove.
X
To install: before installing, ensure that
hub cap : is in the open position. To do
this, turn the center cover counter-clock-
wise.
X
Position hub cap : and turn the center
cover clockwise until hub cap : engages
physically and audibly.
X
Make sure that hub cap : is installed
securely.
Vehicles with AMG wheels and aluminum
hub caps:
X
To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench
= from the vehicle tool kit (
Y page 342).
X
Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X
Position lug wrench = on socket ;.
X
Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap :
counter-clockwise and remove it.
X
To install: before installing, check hub
cap : and the wheel area for soiling and
clean if necessary.
X
Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is
in the right position.
X
Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X
Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and
tighten hub cap :.
The tightening torque must be
18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
i
Note that the hub cap should be tight-
ened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you have the hub cap installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
X
Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
pletely.
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the
rear wheel housings (arrows).
X
Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle
tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of
the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
X
Position jack A at jacking point ?.
386
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X
Turn ratchet wrench B until jack A sits
completely on jacking point ? and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X
Turn ratchet wrench B until the tire is
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Removing a wheel
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during
removal and repositioning of the wheel, the
wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc
and damage it. Therefore, you should pro-
ceed carefully and get a second person
assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a
second alignment bolt.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
When mounting/removing wheels, and for as
long as the wheels are removed, avoid apply-
ing any external force on the brake disks. This
could impair the level of comfort when brak-
ing.
X
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
pletely.
X
Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
G
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-
tion (
Y page 383).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
Changing a wheel
387
Wheels and tires
Z
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during
removal and repositioning of the wheel, the
wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc
and damage it. Therefore, you should pro-
ceed carefully and get a second person
assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a
second alignment bolt.
!
To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
X
Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
ger-tight.
X
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
Lowering the vehicle
G
WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
X
Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are
visible.
X
Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
X
Place the jack to one side.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
to A). The tightening torque must be
110 lb-ft(150 Nm).
X
Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X
Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the trunk again.
X
Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(
Y page 365).
i
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-
tem: all mounted wheels must be equipped
with functioning tire pressure control sen-
sors.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
!
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you only use tires and
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
cle.
388
Wheel and tire combinations
Wheels and tires
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP
®
, and are marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-
sion variations could cause the tires to
come into contact with the bodywork and
axle components. This could result in dam-
age to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage resulting from the use of tires,
wheels or accessories other than those tes-
ted and approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre-
vious damage cannot always be detected
on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-
Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if
retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount
used tires if you have no information about
their previous usage.
Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-
ing tire tables:
R
BA: both axles
R
FA: front axle
R
RA: rear axle
The recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
with the recommended tire pressures on
the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(
Y page 365).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment always
equip the vehicle with:
R
with tires of the same size on a given axle
(left and right)
R
the same type of tires at a given time (sum-
mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(
Y page 343).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
be obtained from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
i
Not all wheel and tire combinations are
available at the factory for all countries.
i
On the following pages, you can find infor-
mation on approved wheel rims and tire
sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter
tires. Winter tires are not available at the
factory as standard equipment or optional
extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, you may also, in cer-
tain circumstances, require rims of the
appropriate size. The size of the approved
Wheel and tire combinations
389
Wheels and tires
Z
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
390
Wheel and tire combinations
Wheels and tires
Tires
S 550 4MATIC
Summer tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/50 R18 100 W
4
RA: 245/50 R18 100 W
4, 2
FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm)
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL
4
RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y
4, 2
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)
FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL
4
RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y
4, 2
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
3
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
3
4
Available as MOExtended tires.
2
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
3
Only for vehicles with AMG Line equipment (code 951).
Wheel and tire combinations
391
Wheels and tires
Z
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL
4
RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL
4, 2
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)
FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL
4
RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL
4, 2
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)
FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL
4
RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL
4, 2
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
3
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
3
All-weather tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S
4
RA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S
4
FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm)
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S
4
RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S
4
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)
FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL M+S
3, 4
RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y M+S
3, 4
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
4
Available as MOExtended tires.
2
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
3
Only for vehicles with AMG Line equipment (code 951).
392
Wheel and tire combinations
Wheels and tires
Winter tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si
4
RA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+S i
4
FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm)
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S i
4
RA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S i
4
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
RA: 9 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.20 in (30.5 mm)
BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+S i
4
BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
3
Mercedes-AMG S 63 4MATIC
Summer tires
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL
5
RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL
2, 5
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL
5
RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL
2, 5
FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
4
Available as MOExtended tires.
3
Only for vehicles with AMG Line equipment (code 951).
5
Not in combination with a ceramic brake system.
2
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Wheel and tire combinations
393
Wheels and tires
Z
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL
6
RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL
2, 6
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL
6
RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL
2, 6
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
Winter tires
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+S i
5
BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+S i
5
BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i
6
BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i
6
BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i
6
RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S i
2, 6
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i
6
RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S i
2, 6
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
6
Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".
2
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
5
Not in combination with a ceramic brake system.
394
Wheel and tire combinations
Wheels and tires
Mercedes-AMG S 65
Summer tires
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL
6
RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL
2, 6
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL
6
RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL
2, 6
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
Winter tires
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i
6
BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i
6
BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i
6
RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S i
2, 6
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)
FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+S i
6
RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+S i
2, 6
FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)
6
Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".
2
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Wheel and tire combinations
395
Wheels and tires
Z
396
Useful information ............................ 398
Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 398
Vehicle electronics ........................... 398
Identification plates ......................... 399
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 400
Vehicle data ....................................... 406
397
Technical data
Useful information
i
This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i
Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (
Y page 26).
Information regarding technical data
i
The data stated here specifically refers to
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with the engine electron-
ics
!
Only have work carried out on the engine
electronics and its associated parts, such
as control units, sensors, actuating com-
ponents and connector leads, at a qualified
specialist workshop. Vehicle components
may otherwise wear more quickly and the
vehicle's operating permit may be invalida-
ted.
!
Engine management measures under-
taken to increase performance can lead to
increased wear and tear or damage to the
drive system.
Retrofitting two-way radios and
mobile phones (RF transmitters)
Approved antenna positions
:
Front roof area
;
Rear roof area
=
Rear fender
?
Trunk lid
i
On vehicles with panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel, installing an
antenna to the front or rear roof area is not
permitted.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
position the antenna on the side of the
vehicle closest to the center of the road.
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS
21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters
(Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installa-
tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment). Observe the legal require-
ments for retrofittings.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way
radio equipment, use the power supply or
antenna connections intended for use with
the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the man-
ufacturer's additional instructions when
installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-
mum transmission outputs or antenna posi-
tions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
398
Vehicle electronics
Technical data
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at
the base of the antenna must not exceed the
following values:
Waveband Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband
74 - 78 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio/Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 - 460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle with-
out restrictions:
R
RF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequen-
cies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (3G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions
on the outside of the vehicle for the following
wavebands:
R
Trunked radio/Tetra
R
70 cm waveband
R
2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
;
VIN
=
Vehicle model
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
;
VIN
=
Paint code
Identification plates
399
Technical data
i
The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the front right-hand door.
X
Fold cover : down and remove it.
You will see the VIN.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations:
R
on the lower edge of the windshield
(
Y page 400)
R
on the vehicle identification plate
(
Y page 399)
Engine number
:
Engine number (stamped into the crank-
case)
;
VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
=
Emission control information plate,
including the certification of both federal
and Californian emissions standards
Service products and filling capaci-
ties
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
400
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Components and service products must be
matched. Only use products recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused
by the use of products which have not been
recommended is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-
tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz
Operator's Manual in the appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
tion on the containers:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other identifications, for example:
R
0 W-30
R
5 W-30
R
5 W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total capacity
All models
21.1 US gal
(80.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
MercedesAMG vehi-
cles
Approx.
3.2 US gal
(12.0 l)
All other models
Approx.
2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
Service products and filling capacities
401
Technical data
Z
fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
tank and fuel lines drained completely.
!
Only refuel using unleaded premium
grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/
95 RON.
!
Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-
ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to
engine failure.
!
Do not use the following:
R
E85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
R
E100 (100% ethanol)
R
M15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
R
M30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
R
M85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
R
M100 (100% methanol)
R
Gasoline with metalliferous additives
R
Diesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-
tives. Otherwise, engine damage may
occur. This does not include cleaning addi-
tives for the removal and prevention of res-
idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed
with cleaning additives recommended by
Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can
obtain further information from any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-
ble and you have to refuel with unleaded
gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-
lowing precautions:
R
Only fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-
ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
as soon as possible.
R
Do not drive at the maximum speed.
R
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot fi
nd the
label on the pump, ask the staff for assis-
tance.
i
For further information, consult a quali-
fied specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i
E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-
formance and increase fuel consumption.
Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel-
eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower
AKI.
Information on refueling (
Y page 168).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Additives
!
Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
not include additives for the removal and
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
must only be mixed with additives recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with
the instructions for use on the product
label. More information about recommen-
ded additives can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
branded fuels that have additives.
The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
tries may not be sufficient. Residue could
build up in the injection system as a result. In
such cases, and in consultation with an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-
line may be mixed with the cleaning additive
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must
observe the notes and mixing ratios specified
on the container.
402
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Engine oil
General notes
!
Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to ful-
fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not
change the engine oil or oil filter in order to
achieve longer replacement intervals than
those prescribed. You could otherwise
cause engine damage or damage to the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions in the service inter-
val display regarding the oil change. Other-
wise, you may damage the engine and the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(
Y page 400).
The engine oils are matched to the perform-
ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
intervals. You should therefore only use
engine oils and oil filters that are approved for
vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter. Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model MB-Freigabe
or MB-
Approval
All models
229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
i
MB approval is indicated on the oil con-
tainers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
Mercedes-AMG
S 63 4MATIC
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
MercedesAMG
S 65
11.1 US qt (10.5 l)
All other models
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Additives
!
Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Engine oil viscosity
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
means that it is thin.
Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures. The table shows you which
SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
temperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
strongly recommended that you carry out reg-
ular oil changes using an approved engine oil
with the appropriate SAE classification.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
Service products and filling capacities
403
Technical data
Z
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling brake fluid
(
Y page 400).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
shop or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
!
Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
following tasks:
R
corrosion protection
R
antifreeze protection
R
raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-
ant during operation is approximately 266
(130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
tion in the engine cooling system should:
R
be at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 (-37 †).
R
not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
will not be dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-
ance with
MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1
.
i
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
led with a coolant mixture that ensures
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
tion.
i
The coolant is checked with every main-
tenance interval at a qualified specialist
workshop.
404
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Filling capacities
Model Capacity
S 63 AMG 4MATIC
8.2 US qt (7.8 l)
S 65 AMG
11.3 US qt (10.7 l)
All other models
12.8 US qt (12.1 l)
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
!
Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
level sensor may be damaged.
!
Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
Fit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the
information on the antifreeze reservoir.
i
Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is
filled with refrigerant R134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
!
Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-
wise, the climate control system may be
damaged.
Service work, such as topping up refrigerant
or replacing components, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control sys-
tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label
:
Warning symbol
;
Refrigerant filling capacity
=
Applicable SAE standards
?
PAG oil part number
A
Type of refrigerant
Service products and filling capacities
405
Technical data
Z
Warning symbols : indicate:
R
possible dangers
R
having service work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Model Refrigerant
All models
23.3 ± 0.4 oz
(660 ± 10 g)
Model PAG oil
Mercedes-AMG
S 63 4MATIC
3.5 oz
(100 g)
All other models
3.9 oz
(110 g)
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
R
the heights specified may vary as a result
of:
-
tires
-
load
-
condition of the suspension
-
optional equipment
R
optional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Dimensions and weights
Model
: Opening height
MercedesAMG
vehicles
69.1 in (1755 mm)
All other models
68.7 in (1746 mm)
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Vehicle length
198.6 in (5044 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
83.0 in (2108 mm)
Vehicle height
56.0 in (1422 mm)
Wheelbase
115.9 in (2945 mm)
Maximum trunk
load
220 lb (100 kg)
All other models
Vehicle length
197.9 in (5027 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
83.0 in (2108 mm)
Vehicle height
55.6 in (1411 mm)
Wheelbase
115.9 in (2945 mm)
Maximum trunk
load
220 lb (100 kg)
406
Vehicle data
Technical data
Model Turning radius
Mercedes-AMG
S 63 4MATIC
39.0 ft (11.90 m)
All other models
38.1 ft (11.60 m)
Vehicle data
407
Technical data
Z
408
6


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Mercedes S-Class Coupe - 2016 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Mercedes S-Class Coupe - 2016 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 9,04 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info